Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Probability

569 missions · 280 completed

Missions

Open289Completed280All569
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Local Rademacher Complexities II: Local Rademacher Averages of the Classification Loss Class Are Bounded by Weighted Empirical Risk Minimization (Theorem 6.3)Research Paper

Motivation

Local Rademacher averages measure the complexity of a learning problem only near the functions that matter, such as those with small empirical error, rather than over the whole function class. Bartlett, Bousquet and Mendelson (Local Rademacher complexities, Ann. Statist. 33 (2005)) show that error bounds for empirical risk minimization are governed by the fixed point of a sub-root upper bound on such local averages, and that these bounds give fast rates (1/n1/n1/n rather than 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​) under variance conditions. A bound is only useful in practice if it can be computed from the data. For classification with the discrete loss, the paper's Corollary 6.2 states the bound in terms of a localized empirical Rademacher average ψ^n(r)\hat\psi_n(r)ψ^​n​(r). That average is a supremum over a constrained subclass, and it is not obvious how to evaluate it.

Theorem 6.3 of the paper answers this. An upper bound on ψ^n(r)\hat\psi_n(r)ψ^​n​(r) can be computed by any algorithm that minimizes a weighted empirical classification error. A similar reduction was known for the global Rademacher average of a classification class: Bartlett, Boucheron and Lugosi (Model selection and error estimation, Machine Learning 48 (2002)) observed that the empirical Rademacher average equals one half minus an expected empirical risk minimum with random labels, and Lemma 6.4 of the paper is adapted from their argument. Theorem 6.3 shows that localization and the use of star-hulls keep this reduction intact.

Setting

Fix inputs X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ in a set X\mathcal XX (n≥1n\ge1n≥1) and labels Y1,…,Yn∈{−1,1}Y_1,\dots,Y_n\in\{-1,1\}Y1​,…,Yn​∈{−1,1}. Everything below is deterministic given this sample. A classifier is a function f:X→{−1,1}f:\mathcal X\to\{-1,1\}f:X→{−1,1}, and F\mathcal FF is a class of classifiers. The discrete loss is ℓ(y,y′)=1[y≠y′]\ell(y,y')=\mathbf 1[y\ne y']ℓ(y,y′)=1[y=y′]. For a vector z∈Rnz\in\mathbb R^nz∈Rn write

Pnℓ(f(X),z)=1n∑i=1nℓ(f(Xi),zi),Pnℓf=Pnℓ(f(X),Y),P_n\ell(f(X),z)=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n\ell(f(X_i),z_i),\qquad P_n\ell_f=P_n\ell(f(X),Y),Pn​ℓ(f(X),z)=n1​i=1∑n​ℓ(f(Xi​),zi​),Pn​ℓf​=Pn​ℓ(f(X),Y),

so PnℓfP_n\ell_fPn​ℓf​ is the empirical risk of fff.

A sign vector σ∈{−1,1}n\sigma\in\{-1,1\}^nσ∈{−1,1}n plays the role of Rademacher signs, and Eσ\mathbb E_\sigmaEσ​ is the average over all 2n2^n2n sign vectors. The empirical Rademacher average of the loss functions of the classifiers with empirical risk at most bbb is

EσRn{ℓf:f∈F, Pnℓf≤b}=1n Eσsup⁡f∈F, Pnℓf≤b ∑i=1nσi ℓ(f(Xi),Yi).\mathbb E_\sigma R_n\{\ell_f : f\in\mathcal F,\ P_n\ell_f\le b\}=\frac1n\,\mathbb E_\sigma\sup_{f\in\mathcal F,\ P_n\ell_f\le b}\ \sum_{i=1}^n\sigma_i\,\ell(f(X_i),Y_i).Eσ​Rn​{ℓf​:f∈F, Pn​ℓf​≤b}=n1​Eσ​f∈F, Pn​ℓf​≤bsup​ i=1∑n​σi​ℓ(f(Xi​),Yi​).

For c≥0c\ge0c≥0, x>0x>0x>0 and 0<r≤1/20<r\le1/20<r≤1/2, the empirical local Rademacher complexity of the classification loss class is

ψ^n(r)=csup⁡α∈[2r,1]α EσRn{ℓf:f∈F, Pnℓf≤2r/α2}+26xn.\hat\psi_n(r)=c\sup_{\alpha\in[\sqrt{2r},1]}\alpha\,\mathbb E_\sigma R_n\{\ell_f : f\in\mathcal F,\ P_n\ell_f\le 2r/\alpha^2\}+\frac{26x}{n}.ψ^​n​(r)=cα∈[2r​,1]sup​αEσ​Rn​{ℓf​:f∈F, Pn​ℓf​≤2r/α2}+n26x​.

In Corollary 6.2, c=20c=20c=20. The parameter α\alphaα comes from the star-hull of the loss class: rescaling a loss function by α\alphaα turns the constraint Pn(αℓf)2≤2rP_n(\alpha\ell_f)^2\le 2rPn​(αℓf​)2≤2r into Pnℓf≤2r/α2P_n\ell_f\le 2r/\alpha^2Pn​ℓf​≤2r/α2.

For a sign vector σ\sigmaσ and a multiplier μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, the weighted empirical risk minimum is

J(μ)=min⁡f∈F1n∑i=1n∣σi+μYi∣ ℓ(f(Xi),sign⁡(σi+μYi)).J(\mu)=\min_{f\in\mathcal F}\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n|\sigma_i+\mu Y_i|\,\ell\big(f(X_i),\operatorname{sign}(\sigma_i+\mu Y_i)\big).J(μ)=f∈Fmin​n1​i=1∑n​∣σi​+μYi​∣ℓ(f(Xi​),sign(σi​+μYi​)).

It is the smallest weighted training error when the labels are corrupted to sign⁡(σi+μYi)\operatorname{sign}(\sigma_i+\mu Y_i)sign(σi​+μYi​) and example iii has weight ∣σi+μYi∣|\sigma_i+\mu Y_i|∣σi​+μYi​∣.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.3

If some f∈Ff\in\mathcal Ff∈F has Pnℓf≤2rP_n\ell_f\le 2rPn​ℓf​≤2r, then

ψ^n(r)≤csup⁡α∈[2r,1]α Eσmin⁡μ≥0((2rα2−12)μ+12n∑i=1n∣σi+μYi∣−J(μ))+26xn.\hat\psi_n(r)\le c\sup_{\alpha\in[\sqrt{2r},1]}\alpha\,\mathbb E_\sigma\min_{\mu\ge0}\Big(\Big(\frac{2r}{\alpha^2}-\frac12\Big)\mu+\frac1{2n}\sum_{i=1}^n|\sigma_i+\mu Y_i|-J(\mu)\Big)+\frac{26x}{n}.ψ^​n​(r)≤cα∈[2r​,1]sup​αEσ​μ≥0min​((α22r​−21​)μ+2n1​i=1∑n​∣σi​+μYi​∣−J(μ))+n26x​.

The multiplier ccc is kept general, and the term 26x/n26x/n26x/n appears on both sides as printed.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 6.4. For every b∈[0,1]b\in[0,1]b∈[0,1] with a feasible classifier,
EσRn{ℓf:f∈F, Pnℓf≤b}=12−Eσmin⁡{Pnℓ(f(X),σ):f∈F, Pnℓ(f(X),Y)≤b}.\mathbb E_\sigma R_n\{\ell_f : f\in\mathcal F,\ P_n\ell_f\le b\}=\frac12-\mathbb E_\sigma\min\{P_n\ell(f(X),\sigma) : f\in\mathcal F,\ P_n\ell(f(X),Y)\le b\}.Eσ​Rn​{ℓf​:f∈F, Pn​ℓf​≤b}=21​−Eσ​min{Pn​ℓ(f(X),σ):f∈F, Pn​ℓ(f(X),Y)≤b}.
  1. Weak duality (proof of Theorem 6.3). With L(f,μ)=Pnℓ(f(X),σ)+μ(Pnℓ(f(X),Y)−2r/α2)L(f,\mu)=P_n\ell(f(X),\sigma)+\mu(P_n\ell(f(X),Y)-2r/\alpha^2)L(f,μ)=Pn​ℓ(f(X),σ)+μ(Pn​ℓ(f(X),Y)−2r/α2) and g(μ)=min⁡f∈FL(f,μ)g(\mu)=\min_{f\in\mathcal F}L(f,\mu)g(μ)=minf∈F​L(f,μ), for every μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0,
min⁡{Pnℓ(f(X),σ):f∈F, Pnℓ(f(X),Y)≤2r/α2}≥g(μ).\min\{P_n\ell(f(X),\sigma) : f\in\mathcal F,\ P_n\ell(f(X),Y)\le 2r/\alpha^2\}\ge g(\mu).min{Pn​ℓ(f(X),σ):f∈F, Pn​ℓ(f(X),Y)≤2r/α2}≥g(μ).
  1. The identity for g(μ)g(\mu)g(μ) (proof of Theorem 6.3, corrected).
g(μ)=J(μ)−12n∑i=1n∣σi+μYi∣+1+μ2−μ2rα2.g(\mu)=J(\mu)-\frac1{2n}\sum_{i=1}^n|\sigma_i+\mu Y_i|+\frac{1+\mu}2-\mu\frac{2r}{\alpha^2}.g(μ)=J(μ)−2n1​i=1∑n​∣σi​+μYi​∣+21+μ​−μα22r​.

Significance

The theorem turns a quantity defined by a supremum over a data-dependent subclass into one computable by a standard learning primitive. For each sign vector and each multiplier μ\muμ, J(μ)J(\mu)J(μ) is the value of a weighted classification problem, which any weighted empirical risk minimizer solves. The expectation over signs can be estimated by repeated sampling. The paper notes that JJJ is Lipschitz in μ\muμ, so a finite grid of μ\muμ values suffices, and that a sub-root upper bound on ψ^n\hat\psi_nψ^​n​ can then be read off. Combined with Corollary 6.2, this yields error bounds for empirical risk minimization in classification that are computable from the training data and that localize: they depend only on the classifiers with small empirical error.

The result is proved in the paper. It has not been formalized; as far as a search of the Prove2Me catalog shows, neither the classification loss class nor J(μ)J(\mu)J(μ) exists as a formal object. This mission produces machine-checked statements of the theorem and of its three proof steps. These cover the exact identity between Rademacher averages of the discrete loss class and random-label empirical risk minimization, and a Lagrangian duality bound for constrained empirical risk minimization.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to apply Lemma 6.4 and then exchange the constrained minimum for a Lagrangian. Each step has a point where a careless argument fails.

  • Lemma 6.4 needs a change of variables on sign vectors (σi↦−Yiσi\sigma_i\mapsto-Y_i\sigma_iσi​↦−Yi​σi​) that preserves the uniform average. It also needs the identity ℓ(y,y′)=∣y−y′∣/2\ell(y,y')=|y-y'|/2ℓ(y,y′)=∣y−y′∣/2 on {±1}\{\pm1\}{±1}, which fails off {±1}\{\pm1\}{±1}.
  • The Lagrangian step gives only weak duality. The bound is an inequality, and attempts to prove equality in Theorem 6.3 fail in general.
  • The identity for g(μ)g(\mu)g(μ) rests on ℓ(y,y^)=(1−yy^)/2\ell(y,\hat y)=(1-y\hat y)/2ℓ(y,y^​)=(1−yy^​)/2. This holds only for ±1\pm1±1 arguments, while sign⁡(σi+μYi)\operatorname{sign}(\sigma_i+\mu Y_i)sign(σi​+μYi​) is 000 when μ=1\mu=1μ=1 and σi=−Yi\sigma_i=-Y_iσi​=−Yi​. Those terms carry weight zero, and the bookkeeping has to show this.
  • Passing the per-α\alphaα, per-σ\sigmaσ inequalities through the outer supremum and the average requires every supremum and minimum to be over a nonempty, bounded set. This is where the feasibility hypothesis is used.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. Inputs are xs : Fin n → X for an arbitrary type X. Labels and signs are real vectors Fin n → ℝ. Classifiers are functions X → ℝ with values in {±1}\{\pm1\}{±1}, a class is a Set (X → ℝ), and the discrete loss is defined on all real pairs. Sign vectors are indexed by Fin n → Bool through the published UnderstandingML.signVec. Every Eσ\mathbb E_\sigmaEσ​, on both sides of every statement, is the finite average over these 2n2^n2n vectors; no probability measure is used. The empirical Rademacher average is the published UnderstandingML.rademacher applied to the set of loss vectors.
  • Suprema and minima. Every supremum and minimum is Lean's real ⨆/⨅ over a subtype. The hypotheses make each index set nonempty and each family bounded, so these are true suprema and minima. The convention Real.sign 0 = 0 is used where the paper's sign is undefined; it affects only weight-zero terms.
  • Added hypotheses. Each of these is implicit on the page:
    • n≥1n\ge1n≥1;
    • c≥0c\ge0c≥0 (for c<0c<0c<0 the inequality reverses);
    • 0<r≤1/20<r\le1/20<r≤1/2 (otherwise the range of α\alphaα is empty);
    • x>0x>0x>0 (Corollary 6.2's "fix x>0x>0x>0");
    • a classifier with Pnℓf≤2rP_n\ell_f\le 2rPn​ℓf​≤2r in the goal, and a feasible classifier in Lemma 6.4 and in the weak duality step (the page's minima presuppose one);
    • a nonempty F\mathcal FF in the g(μ)g(\mu)g(μ) identity.
  • Corrections of the print. The last display of the proof on p. 30 ends each line with −2r/α2-2r/\alpha^2−2r/α2. From the page's own definition g(μ)=min⁡fL(f,μ)g(\mu)=\min_f L(f,\mu)g(μ)=minf​L(f,μ), the constant is −μ 2r/α2-\mu\,2r/\alpha^2−μ2r/α2, which is the form Theorem 6.3's term (2r/α2−1/2)μ(2r/\alpha^2-1/2)\mu(2r/α2−1/2)μ requires. The milestone states the corrected identity.
  • No trivialization. Without the feasibility hypothesis, Lean would evaluate the empty-class Rademacher average and the unbounded μ\muμ-minimum to the junk value 000, and the goal would compare junk values. The feasibility hypothesis rules this out. The goal is the inequality between the two expressions for ψ^n\hat\psi_nψ^​n​ as printed; it is not restated through g(μ)g(\mu)g(μ), L(f,μ)L(f,\mu)L(f,μ) or Lemma 6.4.
  • Contributions welcome. A reusable lemma that the uniform average over {±1}n\{\pm1\}^n{±1}n is invariant under coordinatewise sign flips would serve beyond this mission, as would general facts about real infima over finite-valued families. Proofs of the three milestones, and of the goal from them, are the main targets.

Selected references

  • P. L. Bartlett, O. Bousquet, S. Mendelson, Local Rademacher complexities, Annals of Statistics 33(4), 1497–1537, 2005. arXiv:math/0508275v1 (cited version): https://arxiv.org/abs/math/0508275, DOI https://doi.org/10.1214/009053605000000282 — §6.2, Corollary 6.2 and Theorem 6.3 (pp. 28–29), Lemma 6.4 (p. 29), proof of Theorem 6.3 (p. 30).
  • P. L. Bartlett, S. Boucheron, G. Lugosi, Model selection and error estimation, Machine Learning 48, 85–113, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1013999503812
  • P. L. Bartlett, S. Mendelson, Rademacher and Gaussian complexities: risk bounds and structural results, Journal of Machine Learning Research 3, 463–482, 2002. https://www.jmlr.org/papers/v3/bartlett02a.html
  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, S. Ben-David, Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms, Cambridge University Press, 2014, Chapter 26 (the Rademacher complexity reused here). https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781107298019
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Computational Issues in an Infinite-Horizon, Multiechelon Inventory Model 3: A Closed Form for the Induced Penalty Cost under Normal DemandResearch Paper

Motivation

Multiechelon inventory theory studies supply systems in which stock is held at several levels: here, a depot that orders from an outside supplier and a retail outlet that is replenished from the depot and faces random customer demand. The question is how much to order and ship in each period so as to minimize expected holding, shortage and ordering costs over an infinite horizon. Clark and Scarf (Management Science, 1960) showed that the finite-horizon problem of a serial system decomposes into single-location problems linked by an induced penalty cost. Federgruen and Zipkin (Operations Research 32(4), 1984) extended the decomposition to the infinite horizon under discounted and average costs, and then asked what it costs to compute an optimal policy.

In the reduced single-location problem the only nonlinear part of the one-period cost is the expected induced penalty PLP^LPL. Any algorithm for the reduced problem (Veinott–Wagner type policy computations, for instance) evaluates PLP^LPL many times. In general each evaluation is a numerical integral. Section 4 of the paper shows that when demand is normal, PLP^LPL has a closed form in the univariate and bivariate standard normal distribution functions. This mission formalizes that closed form, eq. (13) on p. 830.

Setting

Time is discrete. One-period demand is u∼N(μ,σ2)u\sim N(\mu,\sigma^2)u∼N(μ,σ2) with σ>0\sigma>0σ>0, independent across periods. For i≥1i\ge1i≥1, u(i)u^{(i)}u(i) is the total demand over iii periods. It is normal with mean μ(i)=iμ\mu^{(i)}=i\muμ(i)=iμ and standard deviation σ(i)=i1/2σ\sigma^{(i)}=i^{1/2}\sigmaσ(i)=i1/2σ, density f(i)f^{(i)}f(i) and cdf F(i)F^{(i)}F(i). The shipment lead time from depot to outlet is l≥0l\ge0l≥0 and the order lead time from the supplier is L≥1L\ge1L≥1. The cost factors are a system-wide holding cost hd>0h^d>0hd>0, a retailer holding cost hr>0h^r>0hr>0 and a retailer shortage penalty pr>0p^r>0pr>0. Write ps=hd+prp^s=h^d+p^rps=hd+pr. Costs are average costs, so the discount factor is α=1\alpha=1α=1 throughout.

The retailer's one-period cost (p. 822) is

R(x)=−hd(x−μ(l))+prE[u(l+1)−x]++(hd+hr)E[x−u(l+1)]+.R(x)=-h^d(x-\mu^{(l)})+p^rE[u^{(l+1)}-x]^++(h^d+h^r)E[x-u^{(l+1)}]^+ .R(x)=−hd(x−μ(l))+prE[u(l+1)−x]++(hd+hr)E[x−u(l+1)]+.

The critical number xr∗x^{r*}xr∗ is a global minimizer of RRR (property (b), p. 824). The induced penalty cost is P(x)=0P(x)=0P(x)=0 for x≥xr∗x\ge x^{r*}x≥xr∗ and P(x)=R(x)−R(xr∗)P(x)=R(x)-R(x^{r*})P(x)=R(x)−R(xr∗) for x<xr∗x<x^{r*}x<xr∗. Its expectation over the order lead time is

PL(x)=E P[x−u(L)](eq. (10)).P^L(x)=E\,P[x-u^{(L)}]\qquad\text{(eq. (10))}.PL(x)=EP[x−u(L)](eq. (10)).

Let Φ\PhiΦ and ϕ\phiϕ be the standard normal cdf and density, Θ(z)=zΦ(z)+ϕ(z)\Theta(z)=z\Phi(z)+\phi(z)Θ(z)=zΦ(z)+ϕ(z), and Φ(ξ1,ξ2;ρ)\Phi(\xi_1,\xi_2;\rho)Φ(ξ1​,ξ2​;ρ) the cdf of a bivariate normal pair with standard normal marginals and correlation ρ\rhoρ. The paper defines (p. 830)

τ1(x)=−x−(xr∗+μ(L))σ(L),τ2(x)=x−μ(L+l+1)σ(L+l+1),νr∗=xr∗−μ(l+1)σ(l+1),\tau_1(x)=-\frac{x-(x^{r*}+\mu^{(L)})}{\sigma^{(L)}},\quad \tau_2(x)=\frac{x-\mu^{(L+l+1)}}{\sigma^{(L+l+1)}},\quad \nu^{r*}=\frac{x^{r*}-\mu^{(l+1)}}{\sigma^{(l+1)}},τ1​(x)=−σ(L)x−(xr∗+μ(L))​,τ2​(x)=σ(L+l+1)x−μ(L+l+1)​,νr∗=σ(l+1)xr∗−μ(l+1)​, τ3(x)=−x−(xr∗+μ(L))−[σ(L)/σ(l+1)]2[xr∗−μ(l+1)]σ(L)σ(L+l+1)/σ(l+1),\tau_3(x)=-\frac{x-(x^{r*}+\mu^{(L)})-[\sigma^{(L)}/\sigma^{(l+1)}]^2[x^{r*}-\mu^{(l+1)}]}{\sigma^{(L)}\sigma^{(L+l+1)}/\sigma^{(l+1)}},τ3​(x)=−σ(L)σ(L+l+1)/σ(l+1)x−(xr∗+μ(L))−[σ(L)/σ(l+1)]2[xr∗−μ(l+1)]​, ϵ1(x)=Φ[τ3(x)]ϕ[τ2(x)]σ(L+l+1),ϵ2(x)=Φ(νr∗)ϕ[τ1(x)]σ(L),ι(x)=σ(L)Θ[τ1(x)],\epsilon_1(x)=\frac{\Phi[\tau_3(x)]\phi[\tau_2(x)]}{\sigma^{(L+l+1)}},\qquad \epsilon_2(x)=\frac{\Phi(\nu^{r*})\phi[\tau_1(x)]}{\sigma^{(L)}},\qquad \iota(x)=\sigma^{(L)}\Theta[\tau_1(x)],ϵ1​(x)=σ(L+l+1)Φ[τ3​(x)]ϕ[τ2​(x)]​,ϵ2​(x)=σ(L)Φ(νr∗)ϕ[τ1​(x)]​,ι(x)=σ(L)Θ[τ1​(x)], κ(x)=σ(l+1)Θ(νr∗)Φ[τ1(x)]−{[σ(L+l+1)]2ϵ1(x)−[σ(L)]2ϵ2(x)}−[x−μ(L+l+1)] Φ[τ1(x),τ2(x);ρ],\kappa(x)=\sigma^{(l+1)}\Theta(\nu^{r*})\Phi[\tau_1(x)]-\{[\sigma^{(L+l+1)}]^2\epsilon_1(x)-[\sigma^{(L)}]^2\epsilon_2(x)\}-[x-\mu^{(L+l+1)}]\,\Phi[\tau_1(x),\tau_2(x);\rho],κ(x)=σ(l+1)Θ(νr∗)Φ[τ1​(x)]−{[σ(L+l+1)]2ϵ1​(x)−[σ(L)]2ϵ2​(x)}−[x−μ(L+l+1)]Φ[τ1​(x),τ2​(x);ρ],

with ρ=−σ(L)/σ(L+l+1)\rho=-\sigma^{(L)}/\sigma^{(L+l+1)}ρ=−σ(L)/σ(L+l+1).

Formalization targets

Goal: eq. (13)

For every real xxx,

PL(x)=ps ι(x)−(ps+hr) κ(x).P^L(x)=p^s\,\iota(x)-(p^s+h^r)\,\kappa(x).PL(x)=psι(x)−(ps+hr)κ(x).

This is an exact identity for every admissible parameter value. It holds with no constants left free.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's outline of the derivation on pp. 829–831:

  1. eq. (11), R(x)=ps[μ(l+1)−x]+(ps+hr)∫−∞xF(l+1)(t) dt−hdμR(x)=p^s[\mu^{(l+1)}-x]+(p^s+h^r)\int_{-\infty}^xF^{(l+1)}(t)\,dt-h^d\muR(x)=ps[μ(l+1)−x]+(ps+hr)∫−∞x​F(l+1)(t)dt−hdμ;
  2. eq. (12), PL(x)=∫x−xr∗∞[R(x−t)−R(xr∗)]f(L)(t) dtP^L(x)=\int_{x-x^{r*}}^\infty[R(x-t)-R(x^{r*})]f^{(L)}(t)\,dtPL(x)=∫x−xr∗∞​[R(x−t)−R(xr∗)]f(L)(t)dt;
  3. eq. (14), PL′(x)=−psΦ[τ1(x)]+(ps+hr)∫x−xr∗∞F(l+1)(x−t)f(L)(t) dtP^{L\prime}(x)=-p^s\Phi[\tau_1(x)]+(p^s+h^r)\int_{x-x^{r*}}^\infty F^{(l+1)}(x-t)f^{(L)}(t)\,dtPL′(x)=−psΦ[τ1​(x)]+(ps+hr)∫x−xr∗∞​F(l+1)(x−t)f(L)(t)dt;
  4. eq. (15), the same derivative with the integral replaced by Φ[τ1(x),τ2(x);ρ]\Phi[\tau_1(x),\tau_2(x);\rho]Φ[τ1​(x),τ2​(x);ρ];
  5. PL(x)→0P^L(x)\to0PL(x)→0 as x→∞x\to\inftyx→∞, hence PL(x)=−∫x∞PL′(t) dtP^L(x)=-\int_x^\infty P^{L\prime}(t)\,dtPL(x)=−∫x∞​PL′(t)dt;
  6. ι′(x)=−Φ[τ1(x)]\iota'(x)=-\Phi[\tau_1(x)]ι′(x)=−Φ[τ1​(x)] and ι(x)→0\iota(x)\to0ι(x)→0;
  7. the two conditional-normal identities, which give Φ[τ3(x)]\Phi[\tau_3(x)]Φ[τ3​(x)] and Φ(νr∗)\Phi(\nu^{r*})Φ(νr∗);
  8. ddxΦ[τ1(x),τ2(x);ρ]=ϵ1(x)−ϵ2(x)\frac{d}{dx}\Phi[\tau_1(x),\tau_2(x);\rho]=\epsilon_1(x)-\epsilon_2(x)dxd​Φ[τ1​(x),τ2​(x);ρ]=ϵ1​(x)−ϵ2​(x);
  9. and 10. the formulas for ϵ1′\epsilon_1'ϵ1′​ and ϵ2′\epsilon_2'ϵ2′​;
  10. κ′(x)=−Φ[τ1(x),τ2(x);ρ]\kappa'(x)=-\Phi[\tau_1(x),\tau_2(x);\rho]κ′(x)=−Φ[τ1​(x),τ2​(x);ρ] and κ(x)→0\kappa(x)\to0κ(x)→0.

Two side remarks of p. 830 are also included: Θ′=Φ\Theta'=\PhiΘ′=Φ, and the simplified form of τ3\tau_3τ3​.

Significance

The result. Under normal demand, (13) replaces the numerical integral (12) with a few evaluations of Φ\PhiΦ, ϕ\phiϕ and the bivariate normal cdf, all available in standard numerical libraries. Together with the decomposition results of Sections 1–3 of the paper, it makes the policy computation for the two-echelon system with normal demand no harder than a single-location computation with an explicit cost function. The same functions reappear in the paper's Section 5 for several retail outlets, after a reinterpretation of σ(l+1)\sigma^{(l+1)}σ(l+1).

Formalizing it. The paper proves (13) only in outline: it calls the derivation "an elementary integration problem, but … sufficiently involved to warrant an outline" and leaves "tedious algebra" and "more algebra" to the reader. A machine-checked proof turns that outline into a complete argument, including the analytic steps the outline passes over: differentiation under the integral sign, the limits at +∞+\infty+∞, and the identification of an integral of normal densities with a bivariate normal probability. To our knowledge no formal proof of (13) exists, and no bivariate normal distribution function is on the platform yet.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to substitute (11) into (12) and integrate. The result is a double integral of normal densities over a region bounded by a line, and it does not reduce to univariate functions. The paper's route is to differentiate first, identify the derivative (14) as a probability for the correlated pair (u(L),u(L)+u(l+1))(u^{(L)},u^{(L)}+u^{(l+1)})(u(L),u(L)+u(l+1)), and then recover PLP^LPL by integrating from +∞+\infty+∞. That route needs three things: justification for differentiating under the integral in (12), whose integrand has a kink at t=x−xr∗t=x-x^{r*}t=x−xr∗; control of the limits at +∞+\infty+∞; and the conditional-normal identities, which involve conditioning on a null event and so must be handled through densities. The verification of κ′\kappa'κ′ is a long computation with Θ\ThetaΘ, ϵ1\epsilon_1ϵ1​ and ϵ2\epsilon_2ϵ2​, in which every constant matters.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace FZEchelon.NormalDemand. The model data form the structure Data (fields μ,σ,hd,hr,pr,l,L,xr∗\mu,\sigma,h^d,h^r,p^r,l,L,x^{r*}μ,σ,hd,hr,pr,l,L,xr∗). The law of u(i)u^{(i)}u(i) is the platform's normal demand law InventoryControl.newsboyDemand with mean iμi\muiμ and standard deviation i σ\sqrt i\,\sigmai​σ. Expectations are Bochner integrals, and improper integrals are set integrals over Set.Ioi/Set.Iic. Φ\PhiΦ is cdf (gaussianReal 0 1). The bivariate cdf is the iterated integral of the explicit bivariate density over a lower-left quadrant (meaningful for ∣ρ∣<1|\rho|<1∣ρ∣<1; here ρ∈(−1,0)\rho\in(-1,0)ρ∈(−1,0)). Derivatives are HasDerivAt and limits are Tendsto … atTop (𝓝 0).

Standing hypotheses of every theorem: σ>0\sigma>0σ>0; hd,hr,pr>0h^d,h^r,p^r>0hd,hr,pr>0 (p. 821); L≥1L\ge1L≥1; and xr∗x^{r*}xr∗ minimizes RRR. Two of these are added to the page and disclosed. σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 is needed because every τ\tauτ divides by some σ(i)\sigma^{(i)}σ(i). L≥1L\ge1L≥1 is needed because σ(0)=0\sigma^{(0)}=0σ(0)=0, and the paper treats zero order lead time separately (p. 819). Demand is exactly normal, as in §4, which acknowledges that this violates u≥0u\ge0u≥0 and ignores the objection. No nonnegativity, truncation or approximation enters. The goal fixes α=1\alpha=1α=1, the average-cost case the section restricts to. The discounted analogue is not part of this mission.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: every Bochner integral in the statements has an integrable integrand, since integrands grow at most linearly and the normal law has all moments. No division by a zero standard deviation can occur under the hypotheses. A sorry-free check in the workspace shows that all hypotheses hold together, with a minimizer xr∗x^{r*}xr∗ of RRR proved to exist.

Needed infrastructure: properties of gaussianReal (moments, convolution of independent normals), differentiation of parametric integrals, and a bivariate normal distribution function with its partial derivatives. A reusable treatment of the bivariate normal cdf, linking the density form used here to Mathlib's multivariateGaussian, would be a contribution of independent value. Proofs of individual milestones are welcome in any order.

Selected references

  • A. Federgruen and P. Zipkin, Computational Issues in an Infinite-Horizon, Multiechelon Inventory Model, Operations Research 32(4):818–836, 1984. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.32.4.818
  • A. J. Clark and H. Scarf, Optimal Policies for a Multi-Echelon Inventory Problem, Management Science 6(4):475–490, 1960. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.4.475
  • A. F. Veinott Jr. and H. M. Wagner, Computing Optimal (s, S) Inventory Policies, Management Science 11(5):525–552, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.11.5.525
17 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Asymptotic Optimality of Order-up-to Policies in Lost Sales Inventory Systems: Ordering Up to the Newsvendor Level for Penalty b + τh Is Asymptotically Optimal as b → ∞Research Paper

Motivation

Periodic-review inventory systems face a simple choice each period: how much to order before the next demand is known. When unmet demand is lost, the order can affect the stock available several periods later without preserving a backlog that records earlier shortages. This makes the optimal policy difficult to describe when replenishment takes time. An order-up-to policy offers a practical rule: order enough to bring the inventory position to a fixed level. Huh, Janakiraman, Muckstadt and Rusmevichientong ask when that simple rule performs as well as the best admissible lost-sales policy as the penalty for a lost unit grows. Their working paper, pp. 3–4 and 17–18, proves asymptotic optimality for a particular level obtained from a related backorder system.

The motivating costs are concrete. A lost sale may represent an expedited service part or a missed sale whose cost is much larger than one period of holding inventory. The paper's central comparison concerns the high-penalty regime while holding the demand law, lead time and holding rate fixed. The fixed-level policy can be computed from the distribution of demand over the lead time plus the order period; it does not require solving the full lost-sales control problem. The paper also supplies a finite-penalty bound, which this mission retains as a milestone. Huh et al., pp. 3–4, 17–18.

Setting

Let D1,D2,…D_1,D_2,\ldotsD1​,D2​,… be independent, identically distributed nonnegative demands with finite positive mean. An order takes a fixed integer lead time τ≥1\tau\ge1τ≥1 to arrive. At the start of period ttt, the order placed τ\tauτ periods earlier arrives; then a new order is placed, and demand DtD_tDt​ is observed. Unmet demand is lost. At period end, each unit remaining on hand incurs holding cost h>0h>0h>0, and each lost unit incurs penalty b>0b>0b>0. The inventory position counts on-hand units and outstanding orders. An order-up-to-SSS policy raises this position to S≥0S\ge0S≥0 whenever possible.

Write CL,S(h,b)C^{\mathcal L,S}(h,b)CL,S(h,b) for the long-run average cost of that policy and CL∗(h,b)C^{\mathcal L*}(h,b)CL∗(h,b) for the infimum over admissible policies. The corresponding backorder system retains unmet demand as negative net inventory and charges bbb per backordered unit per period. For an order-up-to level SSS, its stationary average cost is

CB,S(h,b)=hE[(S−D)+]+bE[(D−S)+],D=∑i=1τ+1Di.C^{\mathcal B,S}(h,b)=h\mathbb E[(S-\mathbf D)^+]+b\mathbb E[(\mathbf D-S)^+],\qquad \mathbf D=\sum_{i=1}^{\tau+1}D_i.CB,S(h,b)=hE[(S−D)+]+bE[(D−S)+],D=i=1∑τ+1​Di​.

The newsvendor level SB∗(h,b)S^{\mathcal B*}(h,b)SB∗(h,b) is the smallest nonnegative SSS with Pr⁡(D≤S)≥b/(b+h)\Pr(\mathbf D\le S)\ge b/(b+h)Pr(D≤S)≥b/(b+h); it attains the best backorder order-up-to cost CB∗(h,b)C^{\mathcal B*}(h,b)CB∗(h,b). The paper's Assumption 1 concerns this lead-time demand D\mathbf DD: if mD(t)=E[D−t∣D>t]m_{\mathbf D}(t)=\mathbb E[\mathbf D-t\mid\mathbf D>t]mD​(t)=E[D−t∣D>t] when the conditioning event has positive probability and zero otherwise, then mD(t)/t→0m_{\mathbf D}(t)/t\to0mD​(t)/t→0 as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞. Huh et al., pp. 3–4, 9, 11–12.

Formalization targets

Asymptotically optimal order-up-to level

Fix hhh, τ\tauτ and the demand law satisfying Assumption 1. Set Sb+τh=SB∗(h,b+τh)S_{b+\tau h}=S^{\mathcal B*}(h,b+\tau h)Sb+τh​=SB∗(h,b+τh). The goal is the equivalent multiplicative form of Theorem 15(b): for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, all sufficiently large bbb satisfy

inf⁡S≥0CL,S(h,b)≤CL,Sb+τh(h,b)≤(1+ε)CL∗(h,b).\inf_{S\ge0}C^{\mathcal L,S}(h,b)\le C^{\mathcal L,S_{b+\tau h}}(h,b)\le(1+\varepsilon)C^{\mathcal L*}(h,b).S≥0inf​CL,S(h,b)≤CL,Sb+τh​(h,b)≤(1+ε)CL∗(h,b).

The infimum over order-up-to levels captures the paper's best such policy. The right-hand comparator remains the infimum over all admissible lost-sales policies. The multiplicative form also covers an almost-surely constant demand law, where both costs can be zero and a literal ratio would be undefined. Huh et al., Theorem 15(b), p. 17.

Explicit finite-penalty bound

Theorem 15(a) is a milestone. With S′=SB∗(h,b/(τ+1))S'=S^{\mathcal B*}(h,b/(\tau+1))S′=SB∗(h,b/(τ+1)) and ψ(S′;h,q)=qE[(D−S′)+]/(hE[(S′−D)+])\psi(S';h,q)=q\mathbb E[(\mathbf D-S')^+]/(h\mathbb E[(S'-\mathbf D)^+])ψ(S′;h,q)=qE[(D−S′)+]/(hE[(S′−D)+]), its factor is

1+νbψ(S′;h,b/(τ+1))1+ψ(S′;h,b/(τ+1)),νb=(b+τh)(τ+1)b.\frac{1+\nu_b\psi(S';h,b/(\tau+1))}{1+\psi(S';h,b/(\tau+1))},\qquad \nu_b=\frac{(b+\tau h)(\tau+1)}{b}.1+ψ(S′;h,b/(τ+1))1+νb​ψ(S′;h,b/(τ+1))​,νb​=b(b+τh)(τ+1)​.

The milestone states the bound where the expected holding quantity in ψ\psiψ is positive. Earlier milestones state the pathwise comparison of the systems, the two-sided average-cost comparison with penalties b/(τ+1)b/(\tau+1)b/(τ+1) and b+τhb+\tau hb+τh, the lower bound on unrestricted lost-sales optimal cost, the newsvendor formula, and the backorder sensitivity results used by the theorem. Huh et al., Lemmas 5, 9, 13 and Theorems 6, 15, pp. 11–18.

Significance

The theorem gives a specific computable stock level whose relative cost loss vanishes in the high-penalty regime. It addresses the gap between a tractable backorder benchmark and the more difficult lost-sales control problem. The finite-penalty factor states how the comparison depends on lead time, holding cost, penalty and the shortage-to-holding ratio; the asymptotic statement alone would not quantify that dependence. The paper establishes these mathematical results; the mission asks for machine-checked proofs of the stated Lean targets. Huh et al., pp. 17–18.

Formalizing the result would also supply reusable infrastructure for coupled inventory systems: measurable demand-path laws, pathwise recursions with delayed delivery, extended nonnegative long-run costs, and a clean comparison between an explicit policy and the infimum over unrestricted policies. The backorder newsvendor and mean-residual-life components can be reused beyond this particular lost-sales model.

Difficulty

The backorder system has a closed stationary cost formula, while a lost-sales order-up-to process generally cannot be replaced directly by that formula. The paper notes that its on-hand inventory distribution need not converge from every starting state, even under a fixed order-up-to policy. One must therefore justify the long-run comparison without assuming stationarity from an arbitrary start. A second difficulty is the benchmark: comparing only against other order-up-to policies is too weak to establish Theorem 15, because the goal uses the optimal cost over all admissible lost-sales policies. Huh et al., pp. 14–16, 18.

Formalization scope

Lean reuses the published CappedBaseStock lost-sales model. Its demands are nonnegative and i.i.d. with finite positive mean; τ≥1\tau\ge1τ≥1 and h,b>0h,b>0h,b>0. Period zero in Lean is period one in the paper. Both coupled processes start with zero on-hand stock and an empty pipeline. Inventory XtX_tXt​ is read immediately after delivery, before current demand. Lost-sales costs lie in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] and use the limsup of expected Cesàro averages; the backorder closed form uses real Bochner expectations under finite-mean demand. The paper's stationary lost-sales cost and this Cesàro cost are identified using its long-run results, but those convergence results are outside this proposal. Huh et al., pp. 14–16.

The paper prints nonnegative rates in Theorem 15, while its displayed newsvendor fraction and shortage-to-holding ratios require positive denominators. Theorem 6(a) therefore states the ratio limit for nonconstant demand laws. The main theorem uses a multiplicative limit bound that also covers constant demand, where the printed ratio is undefined.

The quantity CL∗C^{\mathcal L*}CL∗ is an infimum over measurable, history-dependent policies with private randomization; no attaining policy is assumed. The backorder optimum is an infimum over nonnegative order-up-to levels. Assumption 1 is imposed on the sum of τ+1\tau+1τ+1 demands, and the limit b→∞b\to\inftyb→∞ is expressed by a positive threshold uniform over all parameter records with the fixed lead time and holding rate. The mission excludes a restricted policy comparator, a fixed penalty, a one-period lead-time specialization, and Assumption 1 on single-period demand. Solvers may contribute proofs of any milestone, along with finite-mean and measurability lemmas needed to connect the model to the backorder benchmarks.

Selected references

  • W. T. Huh, G. Janakiraman, J. A. Muckstadt and P. Rusmevichientong, Asymptotic Optimality of Order-up-to Policies in Lost Sales Inventory Systems, working paper, December 4, 2006; published in Management Science 55(3), 2009. DOI: 10.1287/mnsc.1080.0945.
  • G. Janakiraman, S. Seshadri and G. Shanthikumar, A Comparison of the Optimal Costs of Two Canonical Inventory Systems, working paper, Stern School of Business, New York University, 2005; bound quoted in Huh et al., §5, p. 13. Quoted source.
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Rademacher and Gaussian Complexities: Risk Bounds and Structural Results 4: A Fixed Boolean Combination of k Classes Has Gaussian Complexity at Most 2 Σ_j G_n(F_j)Research Paper

Motivation

Data-dependent risk bounds in statistical learning replace combinatorial quantities such as the VC dimension with averages of how well a function class can fit random noise on the observed sample. Bartlett and Mendelson's article (JMLR 3, 2002) established these averages, the Rademacher and Gaussian complexities, as a general tool: a risk bound (their Theorem 8) holds with a complexity penalty, and the complexity of a complicated class can be bounded through structural results that relate it to the complexities of simpler classes.

This mission formalizes two of those structural results, both stated for Gaussian complexities. The first (Theorem 14) controls a Lipschitz function of several real-valued classes at once, the vector-valued analogue of the classical contraction principle. The second (Theorem 16) controls an arbitrary fixed boolean combination of classes of classifiers, such as intersections, unions or majority votes of a fixed number of base classifiers, by the sum of the complexities of the components. Such combinations arise whenever a classifier is assembled from simpler ones, for instance in decision lists, small decision trees over a base class, or voting schemes.

Setting

Let X\mathcal XX be a set, μ\muμ a probability measure on it, and n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 a sample size. For a class FFF of functions X→R\mathcal X \to \mathbb RX→R and a sample x=(x1,…,xn)x = (x_1, \dots, x_n)x=(x1​,…,xn​), the empirical Gaussian complexity is

G^n(F)(x)=E[sup⁡f∈F∣2n∑i=1ngif(xi)∣],\hat G_n(F)(x) = \mathbb E\left[\sup_{f\in F}\left|\frac2n\sum_{i=1}^n g_i f(x_i)\right|\right],G^n​(F)(x)=E[f∈Fsup​​n2​i=1∑n​gi​f(xi​)​],

with g1,…,gng_1, \dots, g_ng1​,…,gn​ independent standard Gaussian N(0,1)N(0,1)N(0,1) variables, and the Gaussian complexity is Gn(F)=E G^n(F)(X1,…,Xn)G_n(F) = \mathbb E\, \hat G_n(F)(X_1, \dots, X_n)Gn​(F)=EG^n​(F)(X1​,…,Xn​) for X1,…,XnX_1, \dots, X_nX1​,…,Xn​ i.i.d. with law μ\muμ (Definition 2, p. 464). In Lean these are empiricalGaussian n F x and gaussianComplexity μ n F.

Three constructions of classes appear.

  • Direct sum. With A=Rm\mathcal A = \mathbb R^mA=Rm carrying the Euclidean distance, a class FFF of maps X→A\mathcal X \to \mathcal AX→A is a subset of the direct sum of real classes F1,…,FmF_1, \dots, F_mF1​,…,Fm​ when each f∈Ff \in Ff∈F is x↦(f1(x),…,fm(x))x \mapsto (f_1(x), \dots, f_m(x))x↦(f1​(x),…,fm​(x)) with fi∈Fif_i \in F_ifi​∈Fi​ (SubsetDirectSum F Fi).
  • Composition. For ϕ:Y×A→R\phi : \mathcal Y \times \mathcal A \to \mathbb Rϕ:Y×A→R, ϕ∘f\phi \circ fϕ∘f is (x,y)↦ϕ(y,f(x))(x, y) \mapsto \phi(y, f(x))(x,y)↦ϕ(y,f(x)) and ϕ∘F\phi\circ Fϕ∘F collects these (compClass φ F).
  • Boolean combination. For g:{±1}k→{±1}g : \{\pm1\}^k \to \{\pm1\}g:{±1}k→{±1} and classes F1,…,FkF_1, \dots, F_kF1​,…,Fk​ of {±1}\{\pm1\}{±1}-valued functions, g(F1,…,Fk)={x↦g(f1(x),…,fk(x)):fj∈Fj}g(F_1, \dots, F_k) = \{x \mapsto g(f_1(x), \dots, f_k(x)) : f_j \in F_j\}g(F1​,…,Fk​)={x↦g(f1​(x),…,fk​(x)):fj​∈Fj​} (boolComb g F).

A centred Gaussian process indexed by a finite set III is a family (Xi)i∈I(X_i)_{i \in I}(Xi​)i∈I​ of real random variables whose finite-dimensional laws are jointly Gaussian with mean zero; ∥Xi−Xj∥2=(E(Xi−Xj)2)1/2\|X_i - X_j\|_2 = (\mathbb E(X_i - X_j)^2)^{1/2}∥Xi​−Xj​∥2​=(E(Xi​−Xj​)2)1/2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 16 (p. 472)

For a fixed boolean function g:{±1}k→{±1}g : \{\pm1\}^k \to \{\pm1\}g:{±1}k→{±1} with k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 and classes F1,…,FkF_1, \dots, F_kF1​,…,Fk​ of {±1}\{\pm1\}{±1}-valued functions,

Gn(g(F1,…,Fk))≤2∑j=1kGn(Fj).G_n\bigl(g(F_1, \dots, F_k)\bigr) \le 2 \sum_{j=1}^k G_n(F_j).Gn​(g(F1​,…,Fk​))≤2j=1∑k​Gn​(Fj​).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 13 (p. 471), the comparison of Gaussian processes as printed: if ∥Xi−Xj∥2≤∥Yi−Yj∥2\|X_i - X_j\|_2 \le \|Y_i - Y_j\|_2∥Xi​−Xj​∥2​≤∥Yi​−Yj​∥2​ for all i,ji, ji,j, then Esup⁡iXi≤2 Esup⁡iYi\mathbb E\sup_i X_i \le 2\,\mathbb E\sup_i Y_iEsupi​Xi​≤2Esupi​Yi​.
  2. Theorem 14 (p. 471): if each ϕ(y,⋅)\phi(y, \cdot)ϕ(y,⋅) is LLL-Lipschitz for the Euclidean distance, passes through the origin, and ϕ\phiϕ is uniformly bounded, then for every sample (xk,yk)k≤n(x_k, y_k)_{k \le n}(xk​,yk​)k≤n​,
G^n(ϕ∘F)≤2L∑i=1mG^n(Fi).\hat G_n(\phi \circ F) \le 2L \sum_{i=1}^m \hat G_n(F_i).G^n​(ϕ∘F)≤2Li=1∑m​G^n​(Fi​).
  1. The extension of ggg (proof of Theorem 16, p. 472): g(x)=(1−∥x−a∥)g(a)g(x) = (1 - \|x - a\|)g(a)g(x)=(1−∥x−a∥)g(a) when ∥x−a∥<1\|x - a\| < 1∥x−a∥<1 for a cube vertex aaa, and 000 otherwise, is well defined, extends ggg, maps into [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1], vanishes at 000 and is 111-Lipschitz.

Significance

Theorem 16 turns any bound on the Gaussian complexity of base classes into a bound for a fixed boolean combination of them, at the cost of a factor 222 on the sum of their complexities, whatever ggg and kkk are. Together with the comparison between Gaussian and Rademacher complexities (Lemma 4 of the paper) and the risk bound of Theorem 8, it yields generalization bounds for classifiers built as combinations of base classifiers. Theorem 14 is the general tool: it handles any Lipschitz loss of a vector-valued predictor, such as multiclass margins, through the complexities of its coordinate classes.

All three results are proved in the paper (Lemma 13 is classical and cited from Pisier). None of them is formalized on Prove2Me; the finite-dimensional Sudakov–Fernique inequality, with constant 111, is (HighDimProb.RandomProcesses.sudakov_fernique_finite_dim). This mission produces machine-checked versions of the vector contraction for Gaussian averages and of the boolean-combination bound, and records the corrections the printed statements need.

Difficulty

The obvious approach to Theorem 14 compares two Gaussian processes indexed by the class, but Definition 2 takes the supremum of an absolute value scaled by 2/n2/n2/n, while Gaussian comparison inequalities bound the expected supremum of the process itself. The printed proof equates the two; done carefully, the comparison with the printed constant 222 of Lemma 13 gives only 4L4L4L. Reaching the printed 2L2L2L requires a comparison with constant 111 and an argument that handles the absolute value. A second difficulty is that the classes may be infinite and unbounded, so expected suprema must be handled as extended-valued quantities, and the reduction to finite classes ("without loss of generality") must be justified. For Theorem 16 the extension of ggg must be checked to be Lipschitz across the boundaries of the tents in the Euclidean, not the sup, norm.

Formalization scope

The source is the published JMLR article (vol. 3, 2002, pp. 463–482), not the COLT 2001 version, whose numbering differs.

  • Complexities in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. G^n\hat G_nG^n​ and GnG_nGn​ are lower Lebesgue integrals of an ENNReal supremum against N(0,1)⊗nN(0,1)^{\otimes n}N(0,1)⊗n and μ⊗n\mu^{\otimes n}μ⊗n. An unbounded class has complexity +∞+\infty+∞; a real-valued supremum or Bochner integral would silently return 000 there and make the upper bounds false, so that encoding is ruled out. No finiteness or boundedness of any class is assumed.
  • A=Rm\mathcal A = \mathbb R^mA=Rm is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m), so "Lipschitz" refers to the Euclidean distance as printed. Using Fin m → ℝ (the sup distance) would change the theorem.
  • {±1}\{\pm1\}{±1} is encoded as Z×\mathbb Z^\timesZ× coerced to R\mathbb RR.
  • Lemma 13: centred processes added. As printed the lemma is false: Xi≡5X_i \equiv 5Xi​≡5, Yi≡0Y_i \equiv 0Yi​≡0 satisfy the hypothesis. Both processes are assumed mean zero, as in Slepian's lemma. The two processes may live on different probability spaces; the index set is any finite nonempty type. The constant 222 is kept as printed.
  • Theorem 14: printed proof loose, statement kept. The constant 2L2L2L is kept as printed; the statement is true via the constant-111 comparison. The uniform-boundedness hypothesis on ϕ\phiϕ is kept as printed although the extended-valued formulation does not need it.
  • Theorem 16 and the extension: k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 added. For k=0k = 0k=0 the boolean function is a constant ±1\pm1±1, the right side is 000, and the left side is E2n∣∑igi∣>0\mathbb E\frac2n|\sum_i g_i| > 0En2​∣∑i​gi​∣>0; also the extension would have g(0)=±1g(0) = \pm1g(0)=±1.
  • Theorem 16: measurability guard. Each G^n(Fj)\hat G_n(F_j)G^n​(Fj​) is assumed almost-everywhere measurable as a function of the sample, so that the expectation of ∑jG^n(Fj)\sum_j \hat G_n(F_j)∑j​G^n​(Fj​) is the sum of the expectations. The paper does not discuss measurability.

A complete development needs Gaussian comparison for finite index sets (available on the platform), the reduction from infinite to finite classes for extended-valued suprema, and elementary Euclidean geometry of the cube. The first two are reusable for every Gaussian-average argument in learning theory. Proofs of any milestone, and of the constant-111 variant of Lemma 13 transported between probability spaces, are welcome.

Selected references

  • P. L. Bartlett, S. Mendelson, Rademacher and Gaussian Complexities: Risk Bounds and Structural Results, Journal of Machine Learning Research 3 (2002), 463–482. https://www.jmlr.org/papers/v3/bartlett02a.html
  • G. Pisier, The Volume of Convex Bodies and Banach Space Geometry, Cambridge University Press, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511662454
  • M. Ledoux, M. Talagrand, Probability in Banach Spaces: Isoperimetry and Processes, Springer, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-20212-4
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimization with Stochastic Dominance Constraints: Lagrange Multipliers of a Second-Order Dominance Constraint Are Concave Nondecreasing Utility FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

A decision maker choosing a random outcome XXX (a portfolio return, a policy's cost savings, a schedule's throughput) often has a reference outcome YYY, the result of a benchmark policy, and wants the new outcome to be preferable to it for every risk-averse decision maker, not just on average. Expected-utility theory (von Neumann and Morgenstern) makes this precise: XXX is preferred to YYY by every decision maker with a concave nondecreasing utility function uuu exactly when XXX dominates YYY in the second order, X⪰(2)YX\succeq_{(2)}YX⪰(2)​Y. Requiring X⪰(2)YX\succeq_{(2)}YX⪰(2)​Y as a constraint in an optimization problem avoids having to elicit any particular utility function, which is rarely possible in practice and impossible when several decision makers must agree.

Dentcheva and Ruszczyński (preprint 2002, published in SIAM J. Optim. 14(2), 2003) introduced optimization problems with stochastic dominance constraints and developed their optimality and duality theory. The central finding is that the Lagrange multiplier of a second-order dominance constraint is itself a concave nondecreasing utility function: the optimal solution maximizes the objective plus an expected utility, for a utility function implied by the problem. This interpretation underlies the later literature on dominance-constrained portfolio optimization, risk-averse stochastic programming, and the dual (quantile) theory of stochastic orders.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and L1=L1(Ω,F,P)\mathcal L^1=\mathcal L^1(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)L1=L1(Ω,F,P) the space of integrable random variables with its norm topology. For X∈L1X\in\mathcal L^1X∈L1 the distribution function is F(X;η)=P[X≤η]F(X;\eta)=P[X\le\eta]F(X;η)=P[X≤η] and the second-order shortfall function is

F2(X;η)=∫−∞ηF(X;α) dα,η∈R.(2.1)F_2(X;\eta)=\int_{-\infty}^{\eta}F(X;\alpha)\,d\alpha,\qquad \eta\in\mathbb R. \tag{2.1}F2​(X;η)=∫−∞η​F(X;α)dα,η∈R.(2.1)

Changing the order of integration gives F2(X;η)=E[(η−X)+]F_2(X;\eta)=\mathbb E[(\eta-X)_+]F2​(X;η)=E[(η−X)+​] (2.6), where (⋅)+=max⁡(0,⋅)(\cdot)_+=\max(0,\cdot)(⋅)+​=max(0,⋅). The relation X⪰(2)YX\succeq_{(2)}YX⪰(2)​Y means F2(X;η)≤F2(Y;η)F_2(X;\eta)\le F_2(Y;\eta)F2​(X;η)≤F2​(Y;η) for all η\etaη, and A2(Y)={X∈L1:X⪰(2)Y}A_2(Y)=\{X\in\mathcal L^1:X\succeq_{(2)}Y\}A2​(Y)={X∈L1:X⪰(2)​Y}.

The problem data are a reference outcome Y∈L1Y\in\mathcal L^1Y∈L1, a convex closed set C⊆L1C\subseteq\mathcal L^1C⊆L1, a functional fff that is concave and continuous on CCC, and an interval [a,b][a,b][a,b]. The paper studies the relaxation in which dominance is enforced on [a,b][a,b][a,b]:

max⁡f(X)subject toE[(η−X)+]≤E[(η−Y)+]  for all η∈[a,b],X∈C.(3.1–3.3)\max f(X)\quad\text{subject to}\quad\mathbb E[(\eta-X)_+]\le\mathbb E[(\eta-Y)_+]\ \ \text{for all }\eta\in[a,b],\qquad X\in C. \tag{3.1–3.3}maxf(X)subject toE[(η−X)+​]≤E[(η−Y)+​]  for all η∈[a,b],X∈C.(3.1–3.3)

The uniform dominance condition (Definition 4.1) asks for some X~∈C\tilde X\in CX~∈C with inf⁡η∈[a,b]{F2(Y;η)−F2(X~;η)}>0\inf_{\eta\in[a,b]}\{F_2(Y;\eta)-F_2(\tilde X;\eta)\}>0infη∈[a,b]​{F2​(Y;η)−F2​(X~;η)}>0.

The multiplier class U1\mathcal U_1U1​ consists of the functions u:R→Ru:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Ru:R→R that are concave and nondecreasing, vanish on [b,∞)[b,\infty)[b,∞), and are affine on (−∞,a](-\infty,a](−∞,a]: u(t)=u(a)+c(t−a)u(t)=u(a)+c(t-a)u(t)=u(a)+c(t−a) for t≤at\le at≤a, with a constant c≥0c\ge0c≥0. The Lagrangian is

L(X,u)=f(X)+E[u(X)]−E[u(Y)].(4.1)L(X,u)=f(X)+\mathbb E[u(X)]-\mathbb E[u(Y)]. \tag{4.1}L(X,u)=f(X)+E[u(X)]−E[u(Y)].(4.1)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2

Assume the uniform dominance condition. If X^\hat XX^ is an optimal solution of (3.1)–(3.3), there is u^∈U1\hat u\in\mathcal U_1u^∈U1​ with

L(X^,u^)=max⁡X∈CL(X,u^)(4.2)andE[u^(X^)]=E[u^(Y)].(4.3)L(\hat X,\hat u)=\max_{X\in C}L(X,\hat u)\quad(4.2)\qquad\text{and}\qquad\mathbb E[\hat u(\hat X)]=\mathbb E[\hat u(Y)].\quad(4.3)L(X^,u^)=X∈Cmax​L(X,u^)(4.2)andE[u^(X^)]=E[u^(Y)].(4.3)

Conversely, if for some u^∈U1\hat u\in\mathcal U_1u^∈U1​ a maximizer X^∈C\hat X\in CX^∈C of L(⋅,u^)L(\cdot,\hat u)L(⋅,u^) satisfies (3.2) and (4.3), then X^\hat XX^ is optimal for (3.1)–(3.3).

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof. They are: finiteness of E[u(X)]\mathbb E[u(X)]E[u(X)] for u∈U1u\in\mathcal U_1u∈U1​; the identity (2.6), already proved on the platform; Proposition 2.3 (convexity and closedness of A2(Y)A_2(Y)A2​(Y), and its recession cone); the concavity of the constraint operator G(X)(η)=F2(Y;η)−F2(X;η)G(X)(\eta)=F_2(Y;\eta)-F_2(X;\eta)G(X)(η)=F2​(Y;η)−F2​(X;η) with respect to the cone of nonnegative functions; the existence of a nonnegative measure multiplier μ^\hat\muμ^​ on [a,b][a,b][a,b] satisfying (4.5)–(4.6); the facts that the function uμ(t)=−∫tbμ([τ,b]) dτu_\mu(t)=-\int_t^b\mu([\tau,b])\,d\tauuμ​(t)=−∫tb​μ([τ,b])dτ (t<bt<bt<b), uμ(t)=0u_\mu(t)=0uμ​(t)=0 (t≥bt\ge bt≥b) of a nonnegative measure lies in U1\mathcal U_1U1​ and that every u∈U1u\in\mathcal U_1u∈U1​ is uμu_\muuμ​ for exactly one μ\muμ; the key identity

∫abF2(X;η) dμ(η)=−E[uμ(X)];(4.9)\int_a^b F_2(X;\eta)\,d\mu(\eta)=-\mathbb E[u_\mu(X)]; \tag{4.9}∫ab​F2​(X;η)dμ(η)=−E[uμ​(X)];(4.9)

and the weak-duality step: (3.2) implies E[u(X)]≥E[u(Y)]\mathbb E[u(X)]\ge\mathbb E[u(Y)]E[u(X)]≥E[u(Y)] for every u∈U1u\in\mathcal U_1u∈U1​.

Further: Theorem 5.1

With D(u)=sup⁡X∈CL(X,u)D(u)=\sup_{X\in C}L(X,u)D(u)=supX∈C​L(X,u), the dual problem min⁡u∈U1D(u)\min_{u\in\mathcal U_1}D(u)minu∈U1​​D(u) has a solution, its value equals the primal optimal value, and its solutions are exactly the u^∈U1\hat u\in\mathcal U_1u^∈U1​ satisfying (4.2)–(4.3).

Significance

Theorem 4.2 turns an infinite family of constraints, one for each η∈[a,b]\eta\in[a,b]η∈[a,b], into a single scalar trade-off: at the optimum, the decision maker behaves as an expected-utility maximizer for an implicit utility u^\hat uu^, and the dominance constraint is active exactly in the sense E[u^(X^)]=E[u^(Y)]\mathbb E[\hat u(\hat X)]=\mathbb E[\hat u(Y)]E[u^(X^)]=E[u^(Y)]. Theorem 5.1 makes U1\mathcal U_1U1​ the space of dual variables, which is the starting point of dual decomposition and cutting-plane methods for dominance-constrained problems and of their extensions to several constraints and to higher orders (Sections 6–7 of the paper, not part of this mission).

All results are proved in the paper. Apart from the identity (2.6), which is proved on the platform, none of them is formalized as far as the platform records show. A machine-checked development would provide, on top of the paper, a rigorous treatment of the measure–utility correspondence that the paper obtains from a textbook theorem "after an obvious adaptation", and a careful account of the multiplier class itself (see the scope section on the constant ccc). The definitions of F2F_2F2​ and of the identity (2.6) are shared with the platform's missions on Dual Stochastic Dominance and Related Mean-Risk Models (Ogryczak and Ruszczyński, 2002).

Difficulty

The necessity half needs a Lagrange multiplier for a constraint taking values in the infinite-dimensional space C([a,b])\mathcal C([a,b])C([a,b]); finite-dimensional convex duality does not apply, and the multiplier first appears as a nonnegative measure on [a,b][a,b][a,b], an element of the dual of C([a,b])\mathcal C([a,b])C([a,b]). A Slater-type point is required: without the uniform dominance condition the multiplier may not exist. This is why the dominance relation, which the paper first poses on all of R\mathbb RR, is relaxed to a bounded interval [a,b][a,b][a,b]: for a reference outcome with a smallest value y1y_1y1​, F2(Y;y1)=0F_2(Y;y_1)=0F2​(Y;y1​)=0, so no X~\tilde XX~ can dominate YYY strictly near y1y_1y1​.

The second obstacle is the translation of that measure into a utility function. The identity (4.9) requires an interchange of integrals over R×[a,b]\mathbb R\times[a,b]R×[a,b] and an integration by parts against the distribution function of an arbitrary integrable XXX, followed by a limit in which the integrability of XXX controls the linear growth of uuu at −∞-\infty−∞. The converse direction needs every u∈U1u\in\mathcal U_1u∈U1​ to be represented by a unique measure, through the left derivative of a concave function.

Formalization scope

Outcomes are elements of Mathlib's L1L^1L1 space Ω →₁[P] ℝ over a probability measure P, coerced to functions inside integrals; no statement is pointwise in ω\omegaω. F2F_2F2​ is the published definition DualSSD.Shared.secondPerformance, a Bochner integral of P[X≤α]P[X\le\alpha]P[X≤α] over (−∞,η](-\infty,\eta](−∞,η]. The problem data form a structure whose fields include every standing assumption of the paper: CCC convex and closed, fff concave and continuous on CCC. The constraint (3.2) is stated in its printed expectation form, while Definition 4.1 and the proof objects use F2F_2F2​, as printed; their equality is (2.6).

Committed conventions:

  • U1\mathcal U_1U1​ uses c≥0c\ge0c≥0. The paper prints c>0c>0c>0. With c>0c>0c>0 the necessity half of Theorem 4.2 is false: take Y≡0Y\equiv0Y≡0, [a,b]=[1,2][a,b]=[1,2][a,b]=[1,2], f(X)=EXf(X)=\mathbb EXf(X)=EX and CCC the constant random variables with values in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Then X~≡1\tilde X\equiv1X~≡1 satisfies Definition 4.1, X^≡1\hat X\equiv1X^≡1 is optimal, and (4.3) forces c=0c=0c=0. The proof itself produces c=μ([a,b])c=\mu([a,b])c=μ([a,b]), which vanishes for the zero multiplier of a slack constraint, and the paper calls U1\mathcal U_1U1​ a convex cone, which must contain 000.
  • Definition 4.1's infimum is encoded as a positive lower bound ε\varepsilonε on [a,b][a,b][a,b]. "=max⁡X∈C=\max_{X\in C}=maxX∈C​" is encoded as membership in CCC plus an upper bound over CCC.
  • A nonnegative measure in rca([a,b])\mathbf{rca}([a,b])rca([a,b]) is a finite Borel measure on R\mathbb RR giving zero mass to the complement of [a,b][a,b][a,b], which is the paper's own extension by zero. Integrals ∫ab⋅ dμ\int_a^b\cdot\,d\mu∫ab​⋅dμ are over the closed interval, so atoms at aaa and bbb count.
  • No relation between aaa and bbb is assumed. For a>ba>ba>b every statement remains meaningful: the constraint is vacuous and U1={0}\mathcal U_1=\{0\}U1​={0}.
  • Theorem 5.1's dual function takes values in the extended reals.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: a junk-valued expectation (a Bochner integral of a non-integrable function, which Lean sets to 000) cannot occur for u∈U1u\in\mathcal U_1u∈U1​, and its integrability is a milestone. Dropping the concavity of fff or the convexity of CCC would make the necessity half false, so these assumptions are fields of the problem data.

Infrastructure a complete development needs: convex duality for cone constraints in C([a,b])\mathcal C([a,b])C([a,b]) (or a direct separation argument in R×C([a,b])\mathbb R\times\mathcal C([a,b])R×C([a,b])), the Riesz representation of nonnegative functionals on C([a,b])\mathcal C([a,b])C([a,b]), Fubini and integration by parts for Stieltjes measures, and the measure of a left-continuous monotone function. These pieces are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome. The extensions to several dominance constraints and to higher-order dominance are not included.

Selected references

  • D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Optimization with stochastic dominance constraints, preprint dated December 27, 2002 (Stochastic Programming E-Print Series); published in SIAM Journal on Optimization 14(2):548–566, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623402420528
  • W. Ogryczak and A. Ruszczyński, Dual stochastic dominance and related mean-risk models, SIAM Journal on Optimization 13(1):60–78, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623400375075
  • J. F. Bonnans and A. Shapiro, Perturbation Analysis of Optimization Problems, Springer, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-1394-9
  • J. von Neumann and O. Morgenstern, Theory of Games and Economic Behavior, Princeton University Press, 1944.
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Uniformly Bounded Regret in the Multi-Secretary Problem 1: The Budget-Ratio Policy Has Regret at Most a₁M(ε), Uniformly in the Number of Candidates n and the Budget kResearch Paper

Motivation

The multi-secretary problem is the simplest model of capacity allocation under uncertainty: a decision maker sees nnn candidates one at a time and may hire at most kkk of them, with every decision final. The same structure underlies single-resource revenue management (accepting or rejecting booking requests against a fixed inventory; see Talluri and van Ryzin, The Theory and Practice of Revenue Management, 2004), online knapsack and packing problems, and dynamic assortment of limited stock.

The performance of an online policy is measured against the offline benchmark, the value of the best kkk candidates chosen with full hindsight. The gap between the two is the regret.

  • In the version where the values arrive as a uniform random permutation, Kleinberg (2005) proved that the minimal regret is of order k\sqrt kk​ and gave an algorithm attaining it (as summarized in Remark 1 of the paper below).
  • Arlotto and Gurvich (arXiv:1710.07719, 2017; Stochastic Systems 2019) showed that when the values have a finite support, the optimal online policy, and an explicit simple policy, have regret bounded by a constant that does not depend on nnn or kkk. The constant depends only on the smallest probability mass.

This mission formalizes that upper bound.

Setting

Abilities take values in a finite set A={am<am−1<⋯<a1}\mathcal A=\{a_m<a_{m-1}<\dots<a_1\}A={am​<am−1​<⋯<a1​} of distinct positive reals, with probabilities fj=P(X=aj)>0f_j=\mathbb P(X=a_j)>0fj​=P(X=aj​)>0, ∑jfj=1\sum_j f_j=1∑j​fj​=1. Write Fˉ(aj)=f1+⋯+fj−1\bar F(a_j)=f_1+\dots+f_{j-1}Fˉ(aj​)=f1​+⋯+fj−1​ for the mass strictly above aja_jaj​, and

ϵ=12min⁡{fm,…,f1}.\epsilon=\tfrac12\min\{f_m,\dots,f_1\}.ϵ=21​min{fm​,…,f1​}.

The abilities X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ are independent with this distribution. Budget pairs range over the triangle T={(n,k):0≤k≤n}\mathcal T=\{(n,k):0\le k\le n\}T={(n,k):0≤k≤n}.

  • Offline value. Voff∗(n,k)=E[max⁡{∑tXtσt:σ∈{0,1}n, ∑tσt≤k}]V^*_{\mathrm{off}}(n,k)=\mathbb E\big[\max\{\sum_t X_t\sigma_t:\sigma\in\{0,1\}^n,\ \sum_t\sigma_t\le k\}\big]Voff∗​(n,k)=E[max{∑t​Xt​σt​:σ∈{0,1}n, ∑t​σt​≤k}].
  • Online policies. A policy decides σt∈{0,1}\sigma_t\in\{0,1\}σt​∈{0,1} using only X1,…,XtX_1,\dots,X_tX1​,…,Xt​ and must select at most kkk candidates on every realization. Π(n,k)\Pi(n,k)Π(n,k) is the set of such policies, Vonπ(n,k)=E[∑tXtσtπ]V^\pi_{\mathrm{on}}(n,k)=\mathbb E[\sum_t X_t\sigma^\pi_t]Vonπ​(n,k)=E[∑t​Xt​σtπ​], and Von∗(n,k)=max⁡π∈Π(n,k)Vonπ(n,k)V^*_{\mathrm{on}}(n,k)=\max_{\pi\in\Pi(n,k)}V^\pi_{\mathrm{on}}(n,k)Von∗​(n,k)=maxπ∈Π(n,k)​Vonπ​(n,k).
  • Counts. ZjrZ^r_jZjr​ is the number of aja_jaj​-candidates among the first rrr. The offline sort selects Sjr=min⁡{Zjr,(k−∑i<jZir)+}\mathfrak S^r_j=\min\{Z^r_j,(k-\sum_{i<j}Z^r_i)_+\}Sjr​=min{Zjr​,(k−∑i<j​Zir​)+​} of them. Sjπ,rS^{\pi,r}_jSjπ,r​ counts those selected by π\piπ.
  • Action index. j0(n,k)j_0(n,k)j0​(n,k) is the largest jjj with Fˉ(aj)+12fj≤k/n\bar F(a_j)+\tfrac12f_j\le k/nFˉ(aj​)+21​fj​≤k/n, or 111 if there is none.
  • Thresholds. T1=0T_1=0T1​=0, Tj=Fˉ(aj)+12fjT_j=\bar F(a_j)+\tfrac12 f_jTj​=Fˉ(aj​)+21​fj​ for 2≤j≤m2\le j\le m2≤j≤m, and Tm+1=+∞T_{m+1}=+\inftyTm+1​=+∞.
  • Budget-Ratio (BR) policy. With remaining budget KtK_tKt​ (K0=kK_0=kK0​=k), at time t+1t+1t+1 the policy finds jjj with Tj≤Kt/(n−t)<Tj+1T_j\le K_t/(n-t)<T_{j+1}Tj​≤Kt​/(n−t)<Tj+1​. It selects Xt+1X_{t+1}Xt+1​ if and only if Kt>0K_t>0Kt​>0 and Xt+1≥ajX_{t+1}\ge a_jXt+1​≥aj​.
  • Stopping times. For 0<δ<ϵ0<\delta<\epsilon0<δ<ϵ, τ0\tau_0τ0​ is the first time the budget ratio comes within δ/2\delta/2δ/2 of a threshold, or the cut-off n−2δ−1−1n-2\delta^{-1}-1n−2δ−1−1. The time τ\tauτ of (20) is the first later time the ratio leaves the δ\deltaδ-band around that threshold, or the cut-off.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (first display)

For every ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0 there is a constant MMM such that for every instance with 12min⁡jfj=ϵ\tfrac12\min_jf_j=\epsilon21​minj​fj​=ϵ and all (n,k)∈T(n,k)\in\mathcal T(n,k)∈T, br∈Π(n,k)\mathrm{br}\in\Pi(n,k)br∈Π(n,k) and

Voff∗(n,k)−Von∗(n,k)≤Voff∗(n,k)−Vonbr(n,k)≤a1M.V^*_{\mathrm{off}}(n,k)-V^*_{\mathrm{on}}(n,k)\le V^*_{\mathrm{off}}(n,k)-V^{\mathrm{br}}_{\mathrm{on}}(n,k)\le a_1M.Voff∗​(n,k)−Von∗​(n,k)≤Voff∗​(n,k)−Vonbr​(n,k)≤a1​M.

No constant is fixed. Only the shape is asserted: a bound uniform in nnn, kkk, the support size and the distribution, given ϵ\epsilonϵ.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  • The benchmark inequality Vonπ≤Voff∗V^\pi_{\mathrm{on}}\le V^*_{\mathrm{off}}Vonπ​≤Voff∗​ (p. 5).
  • The sort identity Voff∗=∑jajE[Sjn]V^*_{\mathrm{off}}=\sum_ja_j\mathbb E[\mathfrak S^n_j]Voff∗​=∑j​aj​E[Sjn​] (4).
  • The binomial overshoot bound E[(B−k)+]≤1/(4ε)\mathbb E[(B-k)_+]\le1/(4\varepsilon)E[(B−k)+​]≤1/(4ε) (Lemma 2).
  • The offline decomposition Voff∗=∑i<jaiE[Zin]+ajE[Sjn]+aj+1E[Sj+1n]±a1/(4ϵ)V^*_{\mathrm{off}}=\sum_{i<j}a_i\mathbb E[Z^n_i]+a_j\mathbb E[\mathfrak S^n_j]+a_{j+1}\mathbb E[\mathfrak S^n_{j+1}]\pm a_1/(4\epsilon)Voff∗​=∑i<j​ai​E[Zin​]+aj​E[Sjn​]+aj+1​E[Sj+1n​]±a1​/(4ϵ) (Proposition 1).
  • The sufficient condition: four properties (i)–(iv) of a policy up to a stopping time imply regret at most 3a1M+a1/(4ϵ)3a_1M+a_1/(4\epsilon)3a1​M+a1​/(4ϵ) (Proposition 2).
  • The identification j0(n,k)=jj_0(n,k)=jj0​(n,k)=j on k/n∈[Tj,Tj+1)k/n\in[T_j,T_{j+1})k/n∈[Tj​,Tj+1​) (p. 17).
  • The BR selection probability and the jump bound ∣Kt/(n−t)−Kt+1/(n−t−1)∣≤δ/2|K_t/(n-t)-K_{t+1}/(n-t-1)|\le\delta/2∣Kt​/(n−t)−Kt+1​/(n−t−1)∣≤δ/2 (p. 13).
  • E[τ]≥n−M\mathbb E[\tau]\ge n-ME[τ]≥n−M (Theorem 2).
  • BR and τ\tauτ satisfy (i)–(iv) (Corollary 1).
  • The state-space reduction vℓ(w,κ)=w+gℓ(κ)v_\ell(w,\kappa)=w+g_\ell(\kappa)vℓ​(w,κ)=w+gℓ​(κ) of the Bellman recursion (Proposition 5).

Significance

The result. Bounded regret means that the loss from not knowing the future is a fixed number of candidates' worth of value, however long the horizon and however large the budget. The bound holds uniformly over all distributions with the same ϵ\epsilonϵ. It is attained by an explicit, adaptive, non-randomized rule that compares one ratio with mmm fixed thresholds. The companion result of the same paper shows that every non-adaptive policy suffers regret of order n\sqrt nn​ in the interior regime. Together they quantify the value of adapting to the remaining budget. Lemma 1 of the paper shows the dependence on ϵ\epsilonϵ cannot be removed.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper, but no part of it is machine-checked; there is no multi-secretary or bounded-regret development on the platform. The mission produces several pieces of machinery: a reusable finite model of sequential selection with online policies and the offline benchmark; an explicit online policy with its stopping-time analysis; and a binomial overshoot bound usable elsewhere. The constant MMM is not made explicit in the paper. A formal proof would give one, and sharper constants are welcome.

Difficulty

The offline decomposition and the sufficient condition are bookkeeping with counts and one concentration bound. The hard step is Theorem 2: showing that the budget ratio Kt/(n−t)K_t/(n-t)Kt​/(n−t) stays within δ\deltaδ of its attracting threshold until a bounded expected number of periods before the end. Near the horizon a single selection moves the ratio by about 1/(n−t)1/(n-t)1/(n−t), so the band becomes easy to leave. Equivalently, the target δ(n−τ0−u)\delta(n-\tau_0-u)δ(n−τ0​−u) that the deviation process must exceed shrinks to zero. A standard martingale or drift argument with a fixed band therefore does not give a bound uniform in nnn. The paper combines the mean-reverting drift of the deviation process with an exponential tail bound (its Proposition 4) and a Lyapunov argument. A second subtlety is uniformity: every constant must depend on ϵ\epsilonϵ (and δ\deltaδ) only, never on mmm, the aja_jaj​, nnn or kkk.

Formalization scope

The source is arXiv:1710.07719v2; its printed page numbers equal the PDF page numbers.

Representation.

  • Ability levels are Fin m, with index 0 the largest value a1a_1a1​; Lean index iii is the paper's i+1i+1i+1.
  • Each instance carries aaa strictly decreasing and positive, fff positive with ∑f=1\sum f=1∑f=1.
  • Expectations are finite sums over sequences x:Fin n→Fin mx:\mathrm{Fin}\,n\to\mathrm{Fin}\,mx:Finn→Finm weighted by ∏tf(xt)\prod_tf(x_t)∏t​f(xt​), so no measure theory is needed.
  • Policies are deterministic selection rules σ(x,t)\sigma(x,t)σ(x,t) that are non-anticipating and feasible. Von∗V^*_{\mathrm{on}}Von∗​ is a maximum over this finite set. The paper allows randomized policies; for this finite problem the optimal values coincide (p. 39). In any case, restricting to deterministic policies can only lower Von∗V^*_{\mathrm{on}}Von∗​ and so does not weaken the goal.
  • Voff∗V^*_{\mathrm{off}}Voff∗​ is defined as an expected maximum over selection vectors, not by the sort formula. The sort formula is a milestone.

Quantifiers. The constant MMM in the goal is chosen after ϵ\epsilonϵ and before mmm, the instance, nnn and kkk. A statement with MMM chosen after the instance, or after nnn, is trivial (regret ≤a1n\le a_1n≤a1​n) and is excluded.

Corrections to the printed text, disclosed in the items.

  1. In Theorem 2 and Corollary 1, MMM depends on the auxiliary δ∈(0,ϵ)\delta\in(0,\epsilon)δ∈(0,ϵ) as well, because τ\tauτ does. δ\deltaδ is quantified before MMM. The goal itself is δ\deltaδ-free.
  2. Lemma 2's conditions p+ε≤k/np+\varepsilon\le k/np+ε≤k/n, k/n≤p−εk/n\le p-\varepsilonk/n≤p−ε are stated as (p+ε)n≤k(p+\varepsilon)n\le k(p+ε)n≤k, k≤(p−ε)nk\le(p-\varepsilon)nk≤(p−ε)n, the form used in its proof. This avoids a false case at n=0n=0n=0.
  3. The BR rule is applied at every time t+1∈{1,…,n}t+1\in\{1,\dots,n\}t+1∈{1,…,n}; p. 11 writes {1,…,n−1}\{1,\dots,n-1\}{1,…,n−1}.
  4. τ\tauτ is capped at nnn, which matters only when n=0n=0n=0.
  5. In Proposition 5 the recursions are imposed for κ≥1\kappa\ge1κ≥1 (boundary conditions at κ=0\kappa=0κ=0), and only identity (49) is stated.

Infrastructure. The model definitions (instance, offline value, online policies, counts, thresholds, action index) and the binomial overshoot lemma are reusable for other finite-support online selection and revenue-management results. All of the following are welcome:

  • proofs of individual milestones;
  • an explicit constant;
  • a formal derivation of Von∗(n,k)=vn(0,k)V^*_{\mathrm{on}}(n,k)=v_n(0,k)Von∗​(n,k)=vn​(0,k) connecting Proposition 5 to Von∗V^*_{\mathrm{on}}Von∗​.

Selected references

  • A. Arlotto, I. Gurvich, Uniformly Bounded Regret in the Multi-Secretary Problem, arXiv:1710.07719v2, 2018; Stochastic Systems 9(3), 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1710.07719
  • R. Kleinberg, A multiple-choice secretary algorithm with applications to online auctions, SODA 2005. https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.5555/1070432.1070519
  • K. T. Talluri, G. J. van Ryzin, The Theory and Practice of Revenue Management, Springer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/b139000
  • D. P. Bertsekas, S. E. Shreve, Stochastic Optimal Control: The Discrete-Time Case, Academic Press, 1978.
  • S. Boucheron, G. Lugosi, P. Massart, Concentration Inequalities, Oxford University Press, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199535255.001.0001
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsMachine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Kullback–Leibler Upper Confidence Bounds for Optimal Sequential Allocation I: kl-UCB Draws a Suboptimal Arm log(T)/d(μ_a, μ*) + O(√log T) Times in One-Parameter Exponential FamiliesResearch Paper

Motivation

In a stochastic multi-armed bandit a player repeatedly chooses one of KKK distributions ("arms") and observes a reward drawn from it; the goal is to collect as much reward as possible, which amounts to pulling suboptimal arms as rarely as possible. Lai and Robbins (1985) showed that any reasonable strategy must pull a suboptimal arm aaa at least log⁡T/KL\log T / \mathrm{KL}logT/KL times up to horizon TTT, where KL\mathrm{KL}KL is a Kullback–Leibler divergence between arm aaa and the best arm, and Burnetas and Katehakis (1996) extended the bound to general models. Strategies matching this rate are called asymptotically optimal.

The popular UCB algorithms of Auer, Cesa-Bianchi and Fischer (2002) use Hoeffding-type confidence bounds and are not asymptotically optimal outside special cases. Cappé, Garivier, Maillard, Munos and Stoltz (Ann. Statist. 41(3), 2013; arXiv:1210.1136) analyse kl-UCB, which replaces the Hoeffding radius by a Kullback–Leibler confidence region, and prove a finite-horizon bound whose leading term is exactly the Lai–Robbins constant. This mission formalizes that result for one-parameter exponential families (Theorem 1), the main-text steps of its proof skeleton, and its two corollaries for bounded rewards.

Timeline: Lai and Robbins (1985) lower bound and asymptotically optimal index policies; Agrawal (1995) sample-mean based index policies; Auer, Cesa-Bianchi and Fischer (2002) finite-time analysis of UCB1; Garivier and Cappé (2011) kl-UCB for bounded rewards; Cappé et al. (2013) the unified analysis formalized here.

Setting

A canonical exponential family D={νθ:θ∈Θ}\mathcal D = \{\nu_\theta : \theta\in\Theta\}D={νθ​:θ∈Θ} is given by a dominating measure ρ\rhoρ on R\mathbb RR and a function bbb, with densities dνθdρ(x)=exp⁡(xθ−b(θ))\frac{d\nu_\theta}{d\rho}(x) = \exp(x\theta - b(\theta))dρdνθ​​(x)=exp(xθ−b(θ)). The parameter set Θ\ThetaΘ is the natural parameter space {θ:∫exθ dρ(x)<∞}\{\theta : \int e^{x\theta}\,d\rho(x) < \infty\}{θ:∫exθdρ(x)<∞}, assumed to be an open interval (the family is regular), and bbb is twice differentiable. The mean of νθ\nu_\thetaνθ​ is b˙(θ)\dot b(\theta)b˙(θ), an increasing function, so νθ\nu_\thetaνθ​ is determined by its mean μ\muμ in the open interval I=b˙(Θ)=(μ−,μ+)I = \dot b(\Theta) = (\mu_-,\mu_+)I=b˙(Θ)=(μ−​,μ+​). The divergence (11) is

d(μ,μ′)=KL(νb˙−1(μ),νb˙−1(μ′))=(b˙−1(μ)−b˙−1(μ′))μ−b(b˙−1(μ))+b(b˙−1(μ′)),d(\mu,\mu') = \mathrm{KL}(\nu_{\dot b^{-1}(\mu)},\nu_{\dot b^{-1}(\mu')}) = (\dot b^{-1}(\mu)-\dot b^{-1}(\mu'))\mu - b(\dot b^{-1}(\mu)) + b(\dot b^{-1}(\mu')),d(μ,μ′)=KL(νb˙−1(μ)​,νb˙−1(μ′)​)=(b˙−1(μ)−b˙−1(μ′))μ−b(b˙−1(μ))+b(b˙−1(μ′)),

extended by continuity to the closure Iˉ=[μ−,μ+]\bar I = [\mu_-,\mu_+]Iˉ=[μ−​,μ+​], possibly with the value +∞+\infty+∞.

There are K≥2K\ge2K≥2 arms with laws νθ1,…,νθK∈D\nu_{\theta_1},\dots,\nu_{\theta_K}\in\mathcal Dνθ1​​,…,νθK​​∈D and means μ1,…,μK\mu_1,\dots,\mu_Kμ1​,…,μK​; μ⋆=max⁡aμa\mu^\star = \max_a \mu_aμ⋆=maxa​μa​. At each round t≥1t\ge1t≥1 the player picks an arm AtA_tAt​ based on the past and receives a reward drawn from νAt\nu_{A_t}νAt​​. Na(t)N_a(t)Na​(t) is the number of pulls of arm aaa in rounds 1,…,t1,\dots,t1,…,t, and μ^a(t)\hat\mu_a(t)μ^​a​(t) the mean of the rewards obtained from arm aaa so far.

kl-UCB (Algorithm 2) with a nondecreasing exploration function fff pulls each arm once and then, for t≥Kt\ge Kt≥K, pulls an arm maximizing the index

Ua(t)=sup⁡{μ∈Iˉ:d(μ^a(t),μ)≤f(t)Na(t)}.(12)U_a(t) = \sup\Bigl\{\mu\in\bar I : d(\hat\mu_a(t),\mu) \le \frac{f(t)}{N_a(t)}\Bigr\}. \tag{12}Ua​(t)=sup{μ∈Iˉ:d(μ^​a​(t),μ)≤Na​(t)f(t)​}.(12)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 14)

With f(t)=log⁡t+3log⁡log⁡tf(t) = \log t + 3\log\log tf(t)=logt+3loglogt for t≥3t\ge3t≥3 and f(1)=f(2)=f(3)f(1)=f(2)=f(3)f(1)=f(2)=f(3), for every suboptimal arm aaa and every horizon T≥3T\ge3T≥3,

E[Na(T)]≤log⁡Td(μa,μ⋆)+22πσa,⋆2(d′(μa,μ⋆))2(d(μa,μ⋆))3log⁡T+3log⁡log⁡T+(4e+3d(μa,μ⋆))log⁡log⁡T+8σa,⋆2(d′(μa,μ⋆)d(μa,μ⋆))2+6,\mathbb E[N_a(T)] \le \frac{\log T}{d(\mu_a,\mu^\star)} + 2\sqrt{\frac{2\pi\sigma^2_{a,\star}(d'(\mu_a,\mu^\star))^2}{(d(\mu_a,\mu^\star))^3}}\sqrt{\log T+3\log\log T} + \Bigl(4e+\frac{3}{d(\mu_a,\mu^\star)}\Bigr)\log\log T + 8\sigma^2_{a,\star}\Bigl(\frac{d'(\mu_a,\mu^\star)}{d(\mu_a,\mu^\star)}\Bigr)^2 + 6,E[Na​(T)]≤d(μa​,μ⋆)logT​+2(d(μa​,μ⋆))32πσa,⋆2​(d′(μa​,μ⋆))2​​logT+3loglogT​+(4e+d(μa​,μ⋆)3​)loglogT+8σa,⋆2​(d(μa​,μ⋆)d′(μa​,μ⋆)​)2+6,

where σa,⋆2=max⁡{Var(νθ):μa≤E(νθ)≤μ⋆}\sigma^2_{a,\star} = \max\{\mathrm{Var}(\nu_\theta) : \mu_a\le \mathrm E(\nu_\theta)\le\mu^\star\}σa,⋆2​=max{Var(νθ​):μa​≤E(νθ​)≤μ⋆} and d′d'd′ is the derivative in the first argument.

Milestones

  1. The decomposition (5) of the event {At+1=a}\{A_{t+1}=a\}{At+1​=a} (p. 9).
  2. The split of E[Na(T)]\mathbb E[N_a(T)]E[Na​(T)] after (7) (p. 9).
  3. The passage to local times (8) (pp. 9–10): the overestimation term is bounded by ∑n=1T−KP{ν^a,n∈Cμ†,f(T)/n}\sum_{n=1}^{T-K}\mathbb P\{\hat\nu_{a,n}\in\mathcal C_{\mu^\dagger,f(T)/n}\}∑n=1T−K​P{ν^a,n​∈Cμ†,f(T)/n​}, a sum over fixed sample sizes.
  4. The general bound (10) with n0n_0n0​ of (9) (p. 10).
  5. The deviation bound (13) for an empirical mean with a random number of summands (p. 14).
  6. Lemma 1 (p. 17): the moment-generating function of a distribution on [0,1][0,1][0,1] is dominated by Bernoulli and Gaussian ones.

Companions

Corollary 1 (p. 17, kl-UCB with the Bernoulli divergence for arbitrary rewards in [0,1][0,1][0,1]) and Corollary 2 (p. 18, UCB with radius f(t)/(2Na(t))\sqrt{f(t)/(2N_a(t))}f(t)/(2Na​(t))​), stated as separate theorems.

Significance

Theorem 1 shows that kl-UCB is asymptotically optimal in every regular one-parameter exponential family (Bernoulli, Poisson, Gaussian with known variance, exponential, Gamma with known shape), and it does so with an explicit bound valid at every horizon, not only in the limit. Corollary 2 improves the constants of the classical UCB1 analysis, and Corollary 1 shows that the Bernoulli kl-UCB index is uniformly better than UCB for all bounded rewards.

The result is proved in the paper; its proofs are in the supplemental article (DOI 10.1214/13-AOS1119SUPP, Appendix A), not in the main text. No machine-checked version exists. The platform has a formal analysis of a Bernoulli KL-UCB variant with another exploration function (Lattimore–Szepesvári's Theorem 10.6), which is a different statement. The formalization adds the general exponential-family index, the random-sample-size deviation bound (13) and the full finite-time constant.

Difficulty

The obvious argument bounds P{μ⋆≥Ua⋆(t)}\mathbb P\{\mu^\star \ge U_{a^\star}(t)\}P{μ⋆≥Ua⋆​(t)} by a union bound over the possible values of Na⋆(t)N_{a^\star}(t)Na⋆​(t), which costs a factor ttt and destroys the logarithmic rate. The deviation bound (13) has to control an empirical mean whose number of summands is chosen by the algorithm itself, losing only a factor e⌈εlog⁡t⌉e\lceil\varepsilon\log t\rceile⌈εlogt⌉ over the fixed-sample Chernoff bound; this is the step that needs the strategy to be non-anticipating. The second-order terms depend on the curvature of ddd between μa\mu_aμa​ and μ⋆\mu^\starμ⋆, measured by σa,⋆2\sigma^2_{a,\star}σa,⋆2​ and d′d'd′, and the explicit constants must be tracked through every step. The empirical mean can be an endpoint of Iˉ\bar IIˉ (Bernoulli rewards at small sample sizes), where ddd is only defined as a limit.

Formalization scope

The rewards are a stack Xa,kX_{a,k}Xa,k​ (the (k+1)(k+1)(k+1)-st reward of arm aaa), mutually independent and i.i.d. per arm, the representation of §2.2; this is the platform's RegretBandits.Stochastic.IsStochasticBandit, and the law of Xa,0X_{a,0}Xa,0​ is pinned to νθa\nu_{\theta_a}νθa​​. Arms are Fin K. The exponential family is the platform's OptimalBAI.OptProportions.ExpFamily (with b¨>0\ddot b>0b¨>0, i.e. strict convexity, which the page derives); the natural-parameter-space condition is a separate hypothesis. A run of kl-UCB is a pathwise predicate: rounds 1,…,K1,\dots,K1,…,K pull every arm once and later rounds pull an argmax of the index, ties broken by any rule. The arm choices are measurable and non-anticipating (a measurable function of the arms and rewards already observed). The index (12) is a real supremum over a set containing the empirical mean, so it is never a junk value, and the divergence at an empirical mean on the boundary of Iˉ\bar IIˉ is computed in [0,+∞][0,+\infty][0,+∞]. Statement (13) is made for t≥2t\ge2t≥2: at t=1t=1t=1 its printed right-hand side is 000.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the run predicate forces both initialization and argmax, the index sets are nonempty and bounded, the reward stack is independent under the probability measure, and the Bernoulli divergence is never evaluated at 000 or 111.

A complete development needs exponential-family calculus (convex conjugate of bbb, continuity of ddd up to the boundary), Chernoff bounds for exponential families, a peeling/maximal inequality for random sample sizes, and the counting arguments of §3.1. The deviation bound and the counting arguments are reusable for every index policy on the platform.

Selected references

  • O. Cappé, A. Garivier, O.-A. Maillard, R. Munos, G. Stoltz, Kullback–Leibler upper confidence bounds for optimal sequential allocation, Ann. Statist. 41(3):1516–1541, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1214/13-AOS1119 ; arXiv:1210.1136v4, https://arxiv.org/abs/1210.1136
  • T. L. Lai, H. Robbins, Asymptotically efficient adaptive allocation rules, Adv. Appl. Math. 6:4–22, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-8858(85)90002-8
  • P. Auer, N. Cesa-Bianchi, P. Fischer, Finite-time analysis of the multiarmed bandit problem, Mach. Learn. 47:235–256, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1013689704352
  • A. Garivier, O. Cappé, The KL-UCB algorithm for bounded stochastic bandits and beyond, COLT 2011. https://arxiv.org/abs/1102.2490
  • R. Agrawal, Sample mean based index policies with O(log n) regret for the multi-armed bandit problem, Adv. Appl. Probab. 27:1054–1078, 1995. https://doi.org/10.2307/1427934
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Markov ChainOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Reversibility and Stochastic Networks IX: Partial Balance — Equivalent Characterizations via Truncation, Rate Changes and Time ReversalTextbook

Why partial balance

Equilibrium distributions of Markov models of networks are rarely computed by solving the full equilibrium equations directly. In the classical product-form results (migration processes, Jackson and Kelly networks, loss networks, clustering processes) the equilibrium distribution satisfies a stronger, local family of equations, and that is what makes it computable. The strongest such family is detailed balance, which characterizes reversibility. Many models that are not reversible still satisfy an intermediate family, partial balance: the probability flux balances not pair by pair but across a chosen set of transitions. F. P. Kelly's Reversibility and Stochastic Networks (Wiley, 1979) uses partial balance throughout: quasi-reversibility in Chapter 3 is a form of it, and the models that display it tend to be insensitive, meaning their equilibrium distribution does not change when exponential holding times are replaced by general ones with the same mean.

Section 9.4 of the book collects what partial balance means in a single statement. Theorem 9.5 summarizes Exercises 1.6.2–1.6.4 and 1.7.7–1.7.8 and gives five operational characterizations of partial balance. Corollaries 9.6–9.8 translate them into the language of spatial processes, and Theorem 9.9 turns partial balance of a coarse description into a product-form equilibrium for a finer one. This last step is the mechanism behind insensitivity.

Setting

A Markov process on a state space S\mathcal SS has transition rates q(j,k)≥0q(j,k)\ge0q(j,k)≥0 for j≠kj\ne kj=k, with q(j,j)=0q(j,j)=0q(j,j)=0. It is irreducible: every state can be reached from every other through transitions of positive rate. An equilibrium distribution is a collection of positive numbers π(j)\pi(j)π(j) summing to one that satisfies the equilibrium equations

π(j)∑k∈Sq(j,k)=∑k∈Sπ(k)q(k,j),j∈S.\pi(j)\sum_{k\in\mathcal S}q(j,k)=\sum_{k\in\mathcal S}\pi(k)q(k,j),\qquad j\in\mathcal S.π(j)k∈S∑​q(j,k)=k∈S∑​π(k)q(k,j),j∈S.

For an irreducible process on a finite state space it exists and is unique.

Given a set A⊆S\mathcal A\subseteq\mathcal SA⊆S, π\piπ satisfies partial balance with respect to A\mathcal AA if

π(j)∑k∈Aq(j,k)=∑k∈Aπ(k)q(k,j),j∈A.\pi(j)\sum_{k\in\mathcal A}q(j,k)=\sum_{k\in\mathcal A}\pi(k)q(k,j),\qquad j\in\mathcal A.π(j)k∈A∑​q(j,k)=k∈A∑​π(k)q(k,j),j∈A.

Truncating the process to A\mathcal AA deletes every transition out of A\mathcal AA, and the result is required to be irreducible within A\mathcal AA. The time-reversed process of a process with equilibrium distribution π\piπ has rates π(k)q(k,j)/π(j)\pi(k)q(k,j)/\pi(j)π(k)q(k,j)/π(j).

A spatial process has JJJ sites, the vertices of a graph GGG. Site jjj carries an attribute njn_jnj​ from a finite set Nj\mathcal N_jNj​, and the state space is S=N1×⋯×NJ\mathcal S=\mathcal N_1\times\cdots\times\mathcal N_JS=N1​×⋯×NJ​. Write TjmnT_j^m\mathbf nTjm​n for the state n\mathbf nn with the attribute of site jjj changed to mmm. The process must satisfy three conditions: only one site changes at a time; the rate q(n,Tjmn)q(\mathbf n,T_j^m\mathbf n)q(n,Tjm​n) depends on the other sites only through the neighbours of jjj; and any TjmnT_j^m\mathbf nTjm​n can be reached from n\mathbf nn without changing the other sites. The conditional distribution of site jjj given the rest is P(nj∣nG−j)=π(n)/∑mπ(Tjmn)P(n_j\mid\mathbf n_{G-j})=\pi(\mathbf n)/\sum_m\pi(T_j^m\mathbf n)P(nj​∣nG−j​)=π(n)/∑m​π(Tjm​n). A Markov field is a positive distribution whose conditional distributions depend only on the neighbours of jjj.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 9.5

For an irreducible process on a finite S\mathcal SS with equilibrium distribution π\piπ, a nonempty A\mathcal AA within which the truncated process is irreducible, and a constant c>0c>0c>0, c≠1c\ne1c=1, the following are equivalent:

  1. partial balance with respect to A\mathcal AA;
  2. the equilibrium distribution of the truncated process is π(j)/∑k∈Aπ(k)\pi(j)/\sum_{k\in\mathcal A}\pi(k)π(j)/∑k∈A​π(k);
  3. multiplying the rates q(j,k)q(j,k)q(j,k), j,k∈Aj,k\in\mathcal Aj,k∈A, by ccc leaves the equilibrium distribution unchanged;
  4. multiplying the rates q(j,k)q(j,k)q(j,k), j∈Aj\in\mathcal Aj∈A, k∉Ak\notin\mathcal Ak∈/A, by ccc changes the equilibrium distribution to
Bπ(j) (j∈A),Bcπ(j) (j∉A),B−1=∑j∈Aπ(j)+c∑j∉Aπ(j);B\pi(j)\ (j\in\mathcal A),\qquad Bc\pi(j)\ (j\notin\mathcal A),\qquad B^{-1}=\sum_{j\in\mathcal A}\pi(j)+c\sum_{j\notin\mathcal A}\pi(j);Bπ(j) (j∈A),Bcπ(j) (j∈/A),B−1=j∈A∑​π(j)+cj∈/A∑​π(j);
  1. time reversal and truncation to A\mathcal AA commute.

When S−A\mathcal S-\mathcal AS−A is nonempty, these are also equivalent to:

  1. the chain observed just before each exit from A\mathcal AA and the chain observed just after each entry into A\mathcal AA have the same equilibrium distribution.

Milestones

  • Corollary 9.6: the equivalences for the sets on which all sites but jjj are frozen, i.e. partial balance (9.26) at a site.
  • Corollary 9.7: on a state space with at least two states, partial balance at every site makes π\piπ a Markov field, with 0<π(n)<10<\pi(\mathbf n)<10<π(n)<1 as in the book's definition.
  • Corollary 9.8: the equivalences for the set on which site jjj is frozen at one attribute (9.27).
  • Theorem 9.9: if a reduced description n=f(x)\mathbf n=f(\mathbf x)n=f(x) has a distribution π(n)\pi(\mathbf n)π(n) in partial balance for the rates (9.31), then the finer process has equilibrium distribution π(x)=π(n)∏jPj(xj∣nj)\pi(\mathbf x)=\pi(\mathbf n)\prod_jP_j(x_j\mid n_j)π(x)=π(n)∏j​Pj​(xj​∣nj​).

What the results give

Theorem 9.5 makes partial balance testable by operations on the process itself: truncation, speeding up or slowing down transitions, and time reversal. The book points to close relationships between statement (iv) and the product form of Section 2.3, and between statement (ii) and part (iii) of Theorem 3.12. Corollary 9.6 (iv) explains why the reversed migration process has such a simple form. Corollary 9.7 strengthens Theorem 9.3 by replacing reversibility with partial balance at each site. Theorem 9.9 is the step from partial balance to insensitivity: it is what the book uses to show that a spatial process keeps its equilibrium distribution when the lifetimes of attributes are mixtures of gamma distributions.

All of these results were proved in 1979. None has a machine-checked proof. The platform has the reversible special case of statement (ii) (KellyStochasticNetworks.truncated_reversible) and the rate-level objects for time reversal and truncation, which this mission reuses. Formalizing Theorem 9.5 also produces a reusable account of embedded exit and entry chains of a finite Markov process.

Difficulty

Most of the equivalences (i)–(v) are short manipulations of the equilibrium equations, but each direction from a property of an altered process back to partial balance needs uniqueness of equilibrium distributions for irreducible finite processes, and (v) ⇒ (i) also needs their existence. Mathlib has neither in the form needed here. Statement (vi) is a different kind of claim. The equilibrium distribution of the exit chain is proportional to the exit flux π(j)∑k∉Aq(j,k)\pi(j)\sum_{k\notin\mathcal A}q(j,k)π(j)∑k∈/A​q(j,k), and that of the entry chain to the entry flux. Proving this requires the hitting distributions and the Green's function of the jump chain killed on leaving a set, and the convergence of the series that define them. Corollary 9.8 (v) inherits that work. Theorem 9.9 requires uniqueness for the reduced frozen processes and careful bookkeeping of the fibres {xj:fj(xj)=nj}\{x_j:f_j(x_j)=n_j\}{xj​:fj​(xj​)=nj​}.

Formalization scope

State spaces are finite types, and every sum is an unconditional sum over a finite type. Because the state space is finite, the book's extra condition for (vi), a finite flux out of A\mathcal AA, holds automatically. Rates are real functions with q(j,j)=0q(j,j)=0q(j,j)=0 built into the hypotheses; the reduced rates of (9.31) also have zero self-rates. "The equilibrium distribution of a process is XXX" means: XXX is positive, sums to one, satisfies the equilibrium equations, and every distribution with these properties equals XXX. The book's "c≠0c\ne0c=0 or 111" is read as c>0c>0c>0, c≠1c\ne1c=1, so that altered rates remain rates. Truncation to A\mathcal AA is the published truncatedRates, a process on the subtype A\mathcal AA, and the reversed rates are the published reversedRates. The exit and entry chains are defined from the jump chain through series of restricted matrix powers. Spatial processes live on ∏jNj\prod_j\mathcal N_j∏j​Nj​ with TjmT_j^mTjm​ given by Function.update. In Theorem 9.9 the graph is complete, as the book assumes from p. 202 on.

The equilibrium distribution of the truncated process must be the unique positive normalized solution of the truncated equilibrium equations. It must not be defined as the conditional distribution, which would make (ii) a tautology. For the same reason (iii) and (iv) are stated through the equilibrium equations of the altered rates, not by assumption.

Theorem 9.10 (p. 207) is not a target. Its hypothesis, that a nominal lifetime "can have any distribution with unit mean", is not defined on the page, and the point-process and lifetime description it needs lies outside this rate-level development.

Contributions are welcome at every level: uniqueness and existence of equilibrium distributions for irreducible finite rate matrices (reusable across the series), convergence of the killed Green's function, and proofs of the corollaries from the goal.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks, Wiley, Chichester, 1979; reissued Cambridge University Press, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781139171724 (§9.4, pp. 200–208; §1.6, pp. 25–27)
  • F. P. Kelly and E. Yudovina, Stochastic Networks, Cambridge University Press, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781139565363
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior 2: Random Utility Maximizers Choose by Logit Exactly When Taste Shocks Are Extreme-Value DistributedResearch Paper

Motivation

The conditional logit model assigns to an alternative iii in a finite choice set the probability eVi/∑jeVje^{V_i}/\sum_j e^{V_j}eVi​/∑j​eVj​, where VjV_jVj​ is a "representative utility" built from observed attributes of the alternative and the decision maker. It is the workhorse of discrete choice econometrics, transportation demand forecasting, marketing and revenue management, where it underlies multinomial logit assortment and pricing models. Its appeal for applied work is computational; its appeal for economics is that it can be read as the aggregate behaviour of a population of utility maximizers. This mission formalizes the result that makes that reading exact: Lemmas 1 and 2 of D. McFadden, Conditional logit analysis of qualitative choice behavior (1974), which show that, under a mild regularity condition, logit choice probabilities arise from random utility maximization exactly when the idiosyncratic taste shocks follow the extreme value (Gumbel) distribution.

Timeline:

  • 1959. J. Marschak gives a nonconstructive proof that i.i.d. extreme value shocks yield logit probabilities; R. D. Luce's choice axiom appears the same year.
  • 1965. Luce and Suppes publish the constructive argument, attributed to E. Holman and A. Marley, that is reproduced as the proof of Lemma 1.
  • 1974. McFadden proves the converse (Lemma 2): if i.i.d. shocks with a translation complete distribution produce logit probabilities, the distribution is extreme value.
  • Later. The random utility characterization was extended to correlated shocks (generalized extreme value models, McFadden 1978), which are not part of this mission.

Setting

An individual faces J≥1J \ge 1J≥1 alternatives with representative utilities V1,…,VJ∈RV_1, \dots, V_J \in \mathbb{R}V1​,…,VJ​∈R. The utility of alternative jjj is Uj=Vj+εjU_j = V_j + \varepsilon_jUj​=Vj​+εj​, where the taste shocks ε1,…,εJ\varepsilon_1, \dots, \varepsilon_Jε1​,…,εJ​ are independent and identically distributed with a common law μ\muμ on R\mathbb{R}R and distribution function G(t)=μ((−∞,t])G(t) = \mu((-\infty, t])G(t)=μ((−∞,t]). The individual chooses the alternative of highest utility, so the selection probability of iii is (Equation (2) of the paper)

Pi(V)=Pr⁡[εj−εi<Vi−Vj  for all j≠i],P_i(V) = \Pr\big[\varepsilon_j - \varepsilon_i < V_i - V_j \ \text{ for all } j \ne i\big],Pi​(V)=Pr[εj​−εi​<Vi​−Vj​  for all j=i],

computed under the product law of the shocks. The logit formula (Equation (12)) is Li(V)=eVi/∑j=1JeVjL_i(V) = e^{V_i}/\sum_{j=1}^J e^{V_j}Li​(V)=eVi​/∑j=1J​eVj​. The extreme value law (Equation (13)) is G(ε)=e−e−εG(\varepsilon) = e^{-e^{-\varepsilon}}G(ε)=e−e−ε.

A law μ\muμ is translation complete if for every function hhh of bounded total variation on R\mathbb{R}R with h(±∞)=0h(\pm\infty) = 0h(±∞)=0, the condition ∫h(e+a) dμ(e)=0\int h(e + a)\, d\mu(e) = 0∫h(e+a)dμ(e)=0 for every real aaa forces h=0h = 0h=0 outside a Lebesgue-null set. Laws whose characteristic function never vanishes, the extreme value law among them, are translation complete (footnote 5 of the paper).

In Lean the law is μ : Measure ℝ with [IsProbabilityMeasure μ], GGG is ProbabilityTheory.cdf μ, the selection probability is selProb μ V i for V : Fin J → ℝ, and the logit formula is logitProb V i.

Formalization targets

Goal: the characterization

Fix a universe XXX of alternatives with a representative utility map u:X→Ru:X\to\mathbb Ru:X→R onto the real line. For a translation complete law μ\muμ normalized by G(0)=e−1G(0) = e^{-1}G(0)=e−1,

(for every finite B⊆X, i∈B: Pi(B)=eu(i)∑j∈Beu(j))  ⟺  (∀ε∈R: G(ε)=e−e−ε).\Big(\text{for every finite }B\subseteq X,\ i\in B:\ P_i(B) = \frac{e^{u(i)}}{\sum_{j\in B} e^{u(j)}}\Big) \iff \Big(\forall \varepsilon \in \mathbb{R}:\ G(\varepsilon) = e^{-e^{-\varepsilon}}\Big).(for every finite B⊆X, i∈B: Pi​(B)=∑j∈B​eu(j)eu(i)​)⟺(∀ε∈R: G(ε)=e−e−ε).

The normalization only fixes the location of the shocks: without it the conclusion is the one-parameter family of Lemma 2 below.

Milestones

  1. Equation (3) for i.i.d. shocks without atoms: Pi(V)=∫∏j≠iG(ε+Vi−Vj) dG(ε)P_i(V) = \int \prod_{j \ne i} G(\varepsilon + V_i - V_j)\, dG(\varepsilon)Pi​(V)=∫∏j=i​G(ε+Vi​−Vj​)dG(ε).
  2. The integrand of Lemma 1's proof: under (13), the density times the other distribution functions equals e−εexp⁡(−e−ε∑jeVj−Vi)e^{-\varepsilon} \exp\big(-e^{-\varepsilon} \sum_j e^{V_j - V_i}\big)e−εexp(−e−ε∑j​eVj​−Vi​).
  3. Lemma 1: extreme value shocks give Pi(V)=Li(V)P_i(V) = L_i(V)Pi​(V)=Li​(V) for every JJJ and VVV.
  4. The functional equation of Lemma 2's proof: G(v−log⁡K)=G(v)KG(v - \log K) = G(v)^KG(v−logK)=G(v)K for every positive integer KKK and real vvv.
  5. Values at logarithms of rationals: with α=−log⁡G(0)\alpha = -\log G(0)α=−logG(0), α>0\alpha > 0α>0 and G(log⁡(K/L))=e−αL/KG(\log(K/L)) = e^{-\alpha L / K}G(log(K/L))=e−αL/K for positive integers K,LK, LK,L.
  6. Lemma 2: G(ε)=e−αe−εG(\varepsilon) = e^{-\alpha e^{-\varepsilon}}G(ε)=e−αe−ε for some α>0\alpha > 0α>0, and G(0)=e−1G(0) = e^{-1}G(0)=e−1 gives (13).

Significance

The result separates two readings of the logit formula. Lemma 1 shows that it is consistent with utility maximization; Lemma 2 shows that, within the class of i.i.d. additive random utility models with translation complete shocks, the extreme value law is the only one consistent with it. Consequences drawn from the random utility reading, such as the log-sum formula for expected maximum utility used in welfare analysis, therefore apply to logit models without further distributional assumptions inside that class. The same reading supports the interpretation of multinomial logit demand in assortment optimization and revenue management.

Both lemmas are proved in the paper and in later textbooks; neither is open. As far as a search of the Prove2Me catalog shows, neither has a machine-checked proof. The mission provides Lean statements of the random utility model with i.i.d. shocks, of translation completeness and of the extreme value law that later discrete choice formalizations can reuse.

Difficulty

Lemma 1 is a computation with the extreme value density; its formal cost lies in passing from the product-measure probability (2) to the iterated integral (3) and evaluating an improper integral. Lemma 2 is harder. The natural first idea is to differentiate the logit identity in the utilities and solve a differential equation for GGG; this requires a density, which Lemma 2 does not assume. Without a density, the only handle on GGG is the logit identity itself, an equality of integrals against dGdGdG that holds for every utility vector; turning such integral identities into pointwise information about GGG is where the hypothesis of translation completeness enters, and it yields statements only outside a Lebesgue-null set, so one-sided continuity of distribution functions is needed to recover identities at every point. A second subtlety is that the paper's (14) is written with GGG while the event (2) is strict, so with a general law the integrals involve left limits of GGG.

Formalization scope

Alternatives are indexed by Fin J; the model is indexed by the utility vector, so the individual attributes sss and alternative attributes xjx_jxj​ enter only through VVV. The shocks have joint law Measure.pi (fun _ => μ), which is what "independently identically distributed" means; a general joint law is not allowed. The event in (2) uses strict inequalities, and the selection probability is defined for every law, with no density. Translation completeness quantifies over BoundedVariationOn h Set.univ with limits 000 at both ends; such hhh are bounded and measurable, so the integrals are genuine, and "measure zero" is Lebesgue measure.

Lemma 2's hypothesis is stated on every finite subset of the paper's alternative universe, with a surjective utility map. Distinct alternatives may have the same utility. The printed proof uses KKK equal-utility alternatives, which surjectivity alone need not supply; proving the stated theorem requires an additional continuity argument. A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the selection probability is a genuine product-measure probability, and the hypotheses of the goal are met by the extreme value law, which is translation complete with G(0)=e−1G(0) = e^{-1}G(0)=e−1.

A complete development needs: Fubini for Measure.pi over Fin J split at one coordinate; the Gumbel density and the improper integral ∫e−εe−ce−εdε=1/c\int e^{-\varepsilon} e^{-c e^{-\varepsilon}} d\varepsilon = 1/c∫e−εe−ce−εdε=1/c; the facts that bounded-variation functions are bounded and measurable and that distribution functions are right-continuous with left limits. The integral representation (milestone 1) and the Gumbel computations are reusable in any random utility formalization. Proofs of the milestones, of the footnote-5 fact that the extreme value law is translation complete, and alternative proofs of Lemma 2 are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. McFadden, Conditional logit analysis of qualitative choice behavior, in P. Zarembka (ed.), Frontiers in Econometrics, Academic Press, New York, 1974, pp. 105–142.
  • J. Marschak, Binary choice constraints and random utility indicators, in K. Arrow, S. Karlin, P. Suppes (eds.), Mathematical Methods in the Social Sciences, Stanford University Press, 1960 (Stanford Symposium, 1959).
  • R. D. Luce and P. Suppes, Preference, utility, and subjective probability, in R. D. Luce, R. Bush, E. Galanter (eds.), Handbook of Mathematical Psychology, Vol. III, Wiley, 1965.
  • R. D. Luce, Individual Choice Behavior: A Theoretical Analysis, Wiley, 1959.
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. II, Wiley, 1966, p. 479.
  • D. McFadden, Modelling the choice of residential location, in A. Karlqvist et al. (eds.), Spatial Interaction Theory and Planning Models, North-Holland, 1978, pp. 75–96.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Solving Linear Programs in the Current Matrix Multiplication Time: The Stochastic Central Path Falls Back to a Classical Step with Probability at Most 10/n² per IterationResearch Paper

Motivation

Linear programming, min⁡{c⊤x:Ax=b, x≥0}\min\{c^\top x : Ax=b,\ x\ge0\}min{c⊤x:Ax=b, x≥0} with A∈Rd×nA\in\mathbb R^{d\times n}A∈Rd×n, is the basic model of operations research, and the complexity of solving it is a central question of algorithm theory. Interior-point methods follow the central path: primal–dual pairs (x,s)(x,s)(x,s) with x,s>0x,s>0x,s>0 and xisi=tx_is_i=txi​si​=t for every iii, as the path parameter ttt decreases to 000. A classical short-step method needs O(nlog⁡(n/δ))O(\sqrt n\log(n/\delta))O(n​log(n/δ)) iterations, each solving a linear system with the matrix AXSA⊤A\frac XSA^\topASX​A⊤, for a total of roughly n2.5n^{2.5}n2.5 operations or more.

Cohen, Lee and Song (J. ACM 68(1), 2021; arXiv:1810.07896) showed that linear programs can be solved in time nω+o(1)log⁡(n/δ)n^{\omega+o(1)}\log(n/\delta)nω+o(1)log(n/δ) (for the current values of the matrix multiplication exponent ω\omegaω and its dual α\alphaα), matching the cost of multiplying two n×nn\times nn×n matrices. The analysis has two halves: a data structure that maintains the projection matrix lazily, and the stochastic central path method, which replaces each Newton step by a sparse random step and proves that the iterates still stay close to the central path. This mission formalizes the second half.

Timeline: Karmarkar's projective method (1984) gave the first polynomial interior-point method; Renegar (1988) gave the O(nlog⁡(1/δ))O(\sqrt n\log(1/\delta))O(n​log(1/δ)) path-following bound; Vaidya (1989) reduced the per-iteration cost with low-rank updates; Lee and Sidford (2014–2015) reduced the iteration count to O~(d)\widetilde O(\sqrt d)O(d​); Cohen, Lee and Song (STOC 2019, J. ACM 2021) reached nωn^\omeganω; van den Brand (2020) derandomized the result.

Setting

Vectors are in Rn\mathbb R^nRn and products, quotients and roots of vectors are coordinatewise. For ϵ\epsilonϵ and vectors a,ba,ba,b, a≈ϵba\approx_\epsilon ba≈ϵ​b means (1−ϵ)bi≤ai≤(1+ϵ)bi(1-\epsilon)b_i\le a_i\le(1+\epsilon)b_i(1−ϵ)bi​≤ai​≤(1+ϵ)bi​ for all iii; a≈ϵta\approx_\epsilon ta≈ϵ​t for a scalar ttt is defined likewise. The number of variables is n≥10n\ge10n≥10 and AAA has full row rank d≤nd\le nd≤n.

The potential is Φλ(r)=∑i=1ncosh⁡(λri)\Phi_\lambda(r)=\sum_{i=1}^n\cosh(\lambda r_i)Φλ​(r)=∑i=1n​cosh(λri​), evaluated at r=μ/t−1r=\mu/t-1r=μ/t−1 with μ=xs\mu=xsμ=xs; it is small exactly when every xisix_is_ixi​si​ is close to ttt.

StochasticStep (Algorithm 1) takes positive x,sx,sx,s, a direction δμ\delta_\muδμ​, a sampling parameter kkk and the output v~\widetilde vv of a data structure with x/s≈ϵmpv~x/s\approx_{\epsilon_{\mathrm{mp}}}\widetilde vx/s≈ϵmp​​v. It rescales to x‾=xv~/w\overline x=x\sqrt{\widetilde v/w}x=xv/w​, s‾=sw/v~\overline s=s\sqrt{w/\widetilde v}s=sw/v​ (w=x/sw=x/sw=x/s), draws a sparse vector δ~μ\widetilde\delta_\muδμ​ with independent coordinates, δ~μ,i=δμ,i/pi\widetilde\delta_{\mu,i}=\delta_{\mu,i}/p_iδμ,i​=δμ,i​/pi​ with probability pi=min⁡(1,k(δμ,i2/∥δμ∥22+1/n))p_i=\min(1,k(\delta_{\mu,i}^2/\|\delta_\mu\|_2^2+1/n))pi​=min(1,k(δμ,i2​/∥δμ​∥22​+1/n)) and 000 otherwise, and computes the step (δ~x,δ~s)(\widetilde\delta_x,\widetilde\delta_s)(δx​,δs​) through the projection P‾=X‾/S‾A⊤(AX‾S‾A⊤)−1AX‾/S‾\overline P=\sqrt{\overline X/\overline S}A^\top(A\frac{\overline X}{\overline S}A^\top)^{-1}A\sqrt{\overline X/\overline S}P=X/S​A⊤(ASX​A⊤)−1AX/S​. The draw is repeated until ∥s‾−1δ~s∥∞\|\overline s^{-1}\widetilde\delta_s\|_\infty∥s−1δs​∥∞​ and ∥x‾−1δ~x∥∞\|\overline x^{-1}\widetilde\delta_x\|_\infty∥x−1δx​∥∞​ are at most 1/(100log⁡n)1/(100\log n)1/(100logn); the output is (x+δ~x,s+δ~s)(x+\widetilde\delta_x,s+\widetilde\delta_s)(x+δx​,s+δs​).

Main (Algorithm 2) sets ϵ=140000log⁡n\epsilon=\frac1{40000\log n}ϵ=40000logn1​, ϵmp=140000\epsilon_{\mathrm{mp}}=\frac1{40000}ϵmp​=400001​, k=1000ϵnlog⁡2n/ϵmpk=1000\epsilon\sqrt n\log^2n/\epsilon_{\mathrm{mp}}k=1000ϵn​log2n/ϵmp​, λ=40log⁡n\lambda=40\log nλ=40logn, starts at t=1t=1t=1, and in each iteration sets tnew=(1−ϵ3n)tt^{\mathrm{new}}=(1-\frac{\epsilon}{3\sqrt n})ttnew=(1−3n​ϵ​)t, takes the direction

δμ=(tnewt−1)xs−ϵ2tnew∇Φλ(μ/t−1)∥∇Φλ(μ/t−1)∥2,\delta_\mu=\Big(\frac{t^{\mathrm{new}}}{t}-1\Big)xs-\frac\epsilon2t^{\mathrm{new}}\frac{\nabla\Phi_\lambda(\mu/t-1)}{\|\nabla\Phi_\lambda(\mu/t-1)\|_2},δμ​=(ttnew​−1)xs−2ϵ​tnew∥∇Φλ​(μ/t−1)∥2​∇Φλ​(μ/t−1)​,

runs StochasticStep, and falls back to a deterministic ClassicalStep whenever Φλ(μnew/tnew−1)>n3\Phi_\lambda(\mu^{\mathrm{new}}/t^{\mathrm{new}}-1)>n^3Φλ​(μnew/tnew−1)>n3.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 4.14

For every iteration jjj, almost surely Assumption 4.1 holds for the input of iteration jjj (in particular xjsj≈0.1tjx^js^j\approx_{0.1}t_jxjsj≈0.1​tj​ and ∥δμ∥2≤ϵtj\|\delta_\mu\|_2\le\epsilon t_j∥δμ​∥2​≤ϵtj​), almost surely the resampling loop of iteration jjj succeeds with positive probability, and

P(ClassicalStep is used in iteration j)≤10n2.\mathbb P(\text{ClassicalStep is used in iteration }j)\le\frac{10}{n^2}.P(ClassicalStep is used in iteration j)≤n210​.

The paper writes O(1/n2)O(1/n^2)O(1/n2); its proof gives the constant 101010.

Milestones

Lemma A.1 (variance of a product), Lemma 4.12 (properties of Φλ\Phi_\lambdaΦλ​), Lemma 4.2 (explicit step), Lemma 4.3 and Claim 4.7 (moments and success probability of the sampled step), Lemma 4.8 (moments of μnew\mu^{\mathrm{new}}μnew), and Lemma 4.13:

E[Φλ(μnewtnew−1)]≤Φλ(μt−1)−λϵ15n(Φλ(μt−1)−10n).\mathbf E\Big[\Phi_\lambda\Big(\frac{\mu^{\mathrm{new}}}{t^{\mathrm{new}}}-1\Big)\Big]\le\Phi_\lambda\Big(\frac\mu t-1\Big)-\frac{\lambda\epsilon}{15\sqrt n}\Big(\Phi_\lambda\Big(\frac\mu t-1\Big)-10n\Big).E[Φλ​(tnewμnew​−1)]≤Φλ​(tμ​−1)−15n​λϵ​(Φλ​(tμ​−1)−10n).

Significance

Lemma 4.14 is what makes the randomized method usable: the iterates stay in the 0.10.10.1-neighbourhood of the central path along the whole run, and the expensive fallback is rare enough that its expected cost, O~(n2.5)⋅10/n2\widetilde O(n^{2.5})\cdot 10/n^2O(n2.5)⋅10/n2, is negligible. The paper's cost bound (Lemma 4.16) and its main theorem rest on it. The same potential-based "stochastic central path" analysis was reused in later solvers, for instance for empirical risk minimization (Lee, Song and Zhang, COLT 2019).

The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version exists. A formalization pins down the probabilistic model that the paper leaves implicit (independence of the sampled coordinates, the law of the resampling loop, a data structure and fallback that see only the past) and checks the constants, several of which are tight against printed slack (Remark 4.4).

The running-time claims of the paper (Theorem 2.1's expected time nω+o(1)n^{\omega+o(1)}nω+o(1), Lemma 4.16, Section 5) are not part of this mission: they live in an arithmetic cost model that Lean does not have. The accuracy guarantee of Theorem 2.1 (Lemma A.6, ClassicalStep from [57]) is also outside the mission.

Difficulty

The obvious argument would bound each quantity under the product law of the sparse direction. But StochasticStep resamples, so the step actually taken is distributed according to that law conditioned on a success event, and expectations and variances shift. A second difficulty is that Φλ\Phi_\lambdaΦλ​ is controlled only in expectation, while Assumption 4.1 must hold surely at every iteration; this is reconciled by the deterministic ClassicalStep fallback, which caps Φλ\Phi_\lambdaΦλ​ at n3n^3n3, and by an induction over iterations of E[Φ]≤10n\mathbf E[\Phi]\le10nE[Φ]≤10n under the trajectory law. Claim 4.7 needs a Bernstein inequality, which Mathlib does not yet provide.

Formalization scope

Coordinates are Fin n, vectors Fin n → ℝ, AAA a Matrix (Fin d) (Fin n) ℝ with A.rank = d, and log⁡\loglog the natural logarithm. ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​ is written out as ∑ivi2\sqrt{\sum_iv_i^2}∑i​vi2​​; ∥⋅∥∞≤c\|\cdot\|_\infty\le c∥⋅∥∞​≤c is stated coordinatewise. The sampled direction has law Measure.pi of two-point laws; the step taken by StochasticStep has that law conditioned (ProbabilityTheory.cond) on the success event, and every E\mathbf EE, Var\mathbf{Var}Var of Lemmas 4.3, 4.8 and 4.13 is under this conditioned law. mp.Query is replaced by its value P‾(X‾S‾)−1/2δ~μ\overline P(\overline X\overline S)^{-1/2}\widetilde\delta_\muP(XS)−1/2δμ​; the data structure and ClassicalStep are arbitrary measurable functions UjU_jUj​, CjC_jCj​ of the history with the only properties the paper uses. The trajectory is Mathlib's Ionescu-Tulcea measure, with kernels equal to the step law of Main. nnn is the number of variables of the program the loop runs on.

Deviations from the page, all recorded in the items: Assumption 4.1 is used with ϵ≤1/(40000log⁡n)\epsilon\le1/(40000\log n)ϵ≤1/(40000logn) instead of the printed <<<, because Main sets ϵ\epsilonϵ to exactly that value; O(1/n2)O(1/n^2)O(1/n2) is instantiated as 10/n210/n^210/n2, the constant of the paper's proof; the conclusions of Lemma 4.14 are stated for every iteration index rather than while t>δ2/(32n3)t>\delta^2/(32n^3)t>δ2/(32n3); at ∇Φλ=0\nabla\Phi_\lambda=0∇Φλ​=0 the second term of δμ\delta_\muδμ​ is 000. No hypothesis k≤nk\le nk≤n is imposed.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: every statement that integrates against the conditioned law also concludes that this law is a probability measure (so it cannot be the zero measure), the goal concludes that each resampling loop succeeds with positive probability, the oracles UjU_jUj​, CjC_jCj​ cannot see the coins of the current iteration, and the goal is about the whole iterated process from the initial point, not one step from an arbitrary law.

Contributions welcome: a Bernstein inequality for bounded independent sums, conditional-law lemmas for cond of Measure.pi, and Markov-kernel measurability for the step law; these are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • M. B. Cohen, Y. T. Lee, Z. Song, Solving Linear Programs in the Current Matrix Multiplication Time, J. ACM 68(1), Article 3, 2021. https://doi.org/10.1145/3424305 (arXiv:1810.07896, https://arxiv.org/abs/1810.07896)
  • N. Karmarkar, A new polynomial-time algorithm for linear programming, Combinatorica 4, 1984. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02579150
  • J. Renegar, A polynomial-time algorithm, based on Newton's method, for linear programming, Math. Programming 40, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580724
  • P. M. Vaidya, Speeding-up linear programming using fast matrix multiplication, Proc. 30th FOCS, 1989.
  • Y. T. Lee, A. Sidford, Path finding methods for linear programming, FOCS 2014. https://doi.org/10.1109/FOCS.2014.52
  • Y. T. Lee, Z. Song, Q. Zhang, Solving Empirical Risk Minimization in the Current Matrix Multiplication Time, COLT 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1905.04447
  • J. van den Brand, A deterministic linear program solver in current matrix multiplication time, SODA 2020. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611975994.16
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Graph TheoryMarkov ChainOperations Research+2·Captain: mikedeng1

Reversibility and Stochastic Networks VIII: Markov Fields — A Positive Random Field Is Markov iff It Factorizes over the Simplices of the GraphTextbook

Motivation

Many systems consist of a finite number of sites whose states influence one another only locally: fruit trees in an orchard that are diseased or healthy, power sources that are working or broken, individuals holding one of several views. Chapter 9 of F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks (Wiley, 1979) asks which joint distributions such systems have in equilibrium. Earlier chapters of the book produce product-form distributions in which the components are independent; spatial models instead give a limited dependence, and §9.1 makes that notion precise through Markov fields.

The central characterization, that a positive random field is Markov with respect to a graph exactly when it factorizes over the cliques of that graph, is the theorem of Hammersley and Clifford (1971, unpublished manuscript), with published proofs by Besag (1974), Grimmett (1973) and Preston (1973). It underlies Gibbs random fields in statistical mechanics, spatial statistics, image analysis and graphical models. Kelly's §§9.2–9.3 then use it to identify the equilibrium distributions of interacting-particle Markov processes ("spatial processes"), connecting it to reversibility and partial balance.

Setting

There are JJJ sites, the vertices of a finite graph GGG; ∂j\partial j∂j is the set of neighbours of site jjj and G−jG-jG−j the set of sites other than jjj. Site jjj carries an attribute njn_jnj​ from a finite set Nj\mathcal N_jNj​, and a state is n=(n1,…,nJ)\mathbf n=(n_1,\dots,n_J)n=(n1​,…,nJ​) in S=N1×⋯×NJ\mathcal S=\mathcal N_1\times\cdots\times\mathcal N_JS=N1​×⋯×NJ​. For a set of sites HHH, nH\mathbf n_HnH​ is the vector of attributes of the sites in HHH. The operator TjmT_j^mTjm​ changes the attribute of site jjj to mmm.

A random field is a function π\piπ on S\mathcal SS with π(n)>0\pi(\mathbf n)>0π(n)>0 for every state and ∑nπ(n)=1\sum_{\mathbf n}\pi(\mathbf n)=1∑n​π(n)=1. The conditional probability that site jjj has attribute njn_jnj​ given all other sites is

P(nj∣nG−j)=π(n)∑m∈Njπ(Tjmn).(9.1)P(n_j\mid\mathbf n_{G-j}) = \frac{\pi(\mathbf n)}{\sum_{m\in\mathcal N_j}\pi(T_j^m\mathbf n)}. \qquad (9.1)P(nj​∣nG−j​)=∑m∈Nj​​π(Tjm​n)π(n)​.(9.1)

π\piπ is a Markov field if P(nj∣nG−j)=P(nj∣n∂j)P(n_j\mid\mathbf n_{G-j}) = P(n_j\mid\mathbf n_{\partial j})P(nj​∣nG−j​)=P(nj​∣n∂j​) for every jjj and n\mathbf nn (9.2): the attribute of a site depends on the rest of the system only through its neighbours. A simplex is a single site or a set of sites any two of which are neighbours; C\mathcal CC is the set of simplices of GGG.

A spatial process is a Markov process n(t)\mathbf n(t)n(t) on S\mathcal SS with rates qqq such that (i) only one component changes at a time, (ii) q(n,Tjmn)q(\mathbf n,T_j^m\mathbf n)q(n,Tjm​n) depends on n\mathbf nn only through njn_jnj​ and n∂j\mathbf n_{\partial j}n∂j​, and (iii) TjmnT_j^m\mathbf nTjm​n can be reached from n\mathbf nn by transitions that do not alter nG−j\mathbf n_{G-j}nG−j​. The general spatial process of §9.3 has rates

q(n,Tjmn)=λj(nj,m) Φ(n)ΦG−j(nG−j)(9.15)q(\mathbf n,T_j^m\mathbf n)=\lambda_j(n_j,m)\,\frac{\Phi(\mathbf n)}{\Phi_{G-j}(\mathbf n_{G-j})} \qquad (9.15)q(n,Tjm​n)=λj​(nj​,m)ΦG−j​(nG−j​)Φ(n)​(9.15)

for positive functions Φ\PhiΦ, ΦG−j\Phi_{G-j}ΦG−j​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 9.2 (p. 186)

A random field π\piπ is a Markov field if and only if

π(n)=B∏C∈CϕC(nC),n∈S,(9.5)\pi(\mathbf n) = B\prod_{C\in\mathcal C}\phi_C(\mathbf n_C), \qquad \mathbf n\in\mathcal S, \qquad (9.5)π(n)=BC∈C∏​ϕC​(nC​),n∈S,(9.5)

for some constant BBB and functions ϕC\phi_CϕC​.

Milestones

  • Lemma 9.1 (p. 185): the conditional probabilities P(nj∣nG−j)P(n_j\mid\mathbf n_{G-j})P(nj​∣nG−j​), j∈Gj\in Gj∈G, n∈S\mathbf n\in\mathcal Sn∈S, determine the random field uniquely.
  • Theorem 9.3 (p. 189): the equilibrium distribution of a reversible spatial process is a Markov field.
  • Theorem 9.4 (p. 193): for the rates (9.15), with αj>0\alpha_j>0αj​>0 solving αj(n)∑mλj(n,m)=∑mαj(m)λj(m,n)\alpha_j(n)\sum_m\lambda_j(n,m)=\sum_m\alpha_j(m)\lambda_j(m,n)αj​(n)∑m​λj​(n,m)=∑m​αj​(m)λj​(m,n) (9.16), the equilibrium distribution is
π(n)=B ∏j=1Jαj(nj)Φ(n),(9.17)\pi(\mathbf n) = B\,\frac{\prod_{j=1}^J\alpha_j(n_j)}{\Phi(\mathbf n)}, \qquad (9.17)π(n)=BΦ(n)∏j=1J​αj​(nj​)​,(9.17)

and it satisfies the partial balance equations (9.18) site by site.

Significance

Theorem 9.2 turns a statement about conditional laws, which is how local interaction is usually specified, into an explicit parametrization of the joint law by clique potentials. On a lattice with binary attributes it reduces a Markov field to one parameter per site and one per pair of adjacent sites, giving the form π(n)=BαMβR\pi(\mathbf n)=B\alpha^M\beta^Rπ(n)=BαMβR (9.9). Theorem 9.3 shows that local, reversible dynamics produce Markov-field equilibria, and Theorem 9.4 gives a family of non-reversible processes, containing the closed migration process of Chapter 2, whose equilibria are still explicit; its partial balance equations are the bridge to §9.4.

All four results are classical and proved in the book. They are not, to our knowledge, machine-checked in this discrete form. The platform has an open statement of Hammersley–Clifford in a different setting, HighDimStat.GraphicalModels.thm11_8_hammersley_clifford (Wainwright, High-Dimensional Statistics, Theorem 11.8): a random vector in RV\mathbb R^VRV with a strictly positive Lebesgue density and the global (separation) Markov property. Neither statement implies the other as formalized, so this mission poses Kelly's finite, local version separately. A formal proof here also gives reusable infrastructure: conditional probabilities of a distribution on a finite product space, and factorizations over the cliques of a graph.

Difficulty

The "if" direction is routine. The "only if" direction is where the content lies: the functions ϕC\phi_CϕC​ must be produced from π\piπ alone, and a product over the cliques of GGG must reproduce π\piπ at every state, not only at the states whose nonzero attributes sit on a single clique. The natural first idea, one factor per site read off from the conditional laws, fails as soon as two sites interact. The Markov property must also be brought from its explicit form (9.2), which involves a marginal over the non-neighbours, into a usable statement about π\piπ itself. Strict positivity is essential: without it the "only if" direction is false (Exercise 9.2.2). For Theorem 9.3, condition (iii) cannot be dropped: Exercise 9.2.2 gives a reversible process satisfying (i) and (ii) whose equilibrium is not a Markov field, so any argument that uses only the local form of the rates fails.

Formalization scope

  • Sites form an arbitrary finite type V with decidable equality; attributes at site j form a finite type N j, which may differ between sites. States are dependent functions (j : V) → N j, and TjmnT_j^m\mathbf nTjm​n is Function.update n j m. The graph is a Mathlib SimpleGraph V, so ∂j\partial j∂j is G.neighborSet j.
  • A random field is a real function, positive at every state, with finite sum 111. P(nj∣n∂j)P(n_j\mid\mathbf n_{\partial j})P(nj​∣n∂j​) is the conditional probability computed from π\piπ (a ratio of finite sums), so (9.2) is stated literally.
  • Simplices are the nonempty cliques of the given graph GGG, including single sites. The factorization ranges over exactly these sets; a product over all subsets of sites, or over the cliques of the complete graph, would make the goal trivially true and is ruled out.
  • Theorems 9.3 and 9.4 are read at the level of rates: "equilibrium distribution of a reversible process" is a positive distribution summing to one in detailed balance with qqq (the published KellyStochasticNetworks.DetailedBalance), and "equilibrium distribution" in 9.4 is a positive distribution summing to one satisfying the equilibrium equations (KellyStochasticNetworks.FullBalance), together with its uniqueness under irreducibility. The Markov process itself is not constructed. The state space is always finite, so all sums are finite.
  • Contributions welcome: proofs of any item, general lemmas on conditional laws over finite product spaces, and a formal account of the general Hammersley–Clifford theorem that both this mission and the Wainwright statement could use.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks, Wiley, 1979, Chapter 9. https://www.statslab.cam.ac.uk/~frank/BOOKS/kelly_book.html
  • J. Besag, Spatial interaction and the statistical analysis of lattice systems, J. Roy. Statist. Soc. B 36 (1974), 192–236. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1974.tb00999.x
  • G. R. Grimmett, A theorem about random fields, Bull. London Math. Soc. 5 (1973), 81–84. https://doi.org/10.1112/blms/5.1.81
  • C. J. Preston, Generalized Gibbs states and Markov random fields, Adv. Appl. Probab. 5 (1973), 242–261. https://doi.org/10.2307/1426035
  • M. J. Wainwright, High-Dimensional Statistics, Cambridge University Press, 2019, Theorem 11.8. https://doi.org/10.1017/9781108627771
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Markov ChainOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Reversibility and Stochastic Networks III: Open Networks of Queues with General Customer Routes Have Product-Form EquilibriumTextbook

Motivation

Networks of queues model systems in which jobs visit a sequence of service stations: items in a manufacturing job-shop, packets in a communication network, patients moving between hospital departments. The open migration process of Chapter 2 of F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks (Wiley, 1979), and the job-shop networks of Jackson (Jackson 1963) route a customer leaving a queue at random, independently of where he has been. That rules out the most common situation in practice: an item that has passed machines 1 and 3 must next go to machine 4, while an item that has passed machines 2 and 3 must go to machine 5.

Section 3.1 of the book removes this restriction. Customers are divided into types, a type fixes a deterministic route through the queues, and a stochastic routing rule is recovered by using one type per possible route. Within each queue, the order of service is described by two position-dependent functions, which cover first-come first-served KKK-server queues, last-come first-served, processor sharing and service in random order. Theorem 3.1 states that, for every such network, the equilibrium distribution is a product of explicit single-queue factors. This is the result behind the "Kelly network" and "Kelly-type queue" terminology of later work (Kelly 1975; Baskett, Chandy, Muntz, Palacios 1975).

Setting

There are III customer types and JJJ queues. Customers of type iii enter the system in a Poisson stream of rate ν(i)>0\nu(i)>0ν(i)>0 and visit the queues r(i,1),r(i,2),…,r(i,S(i))r(i,1),r(i,2),\dots,r(i,S(i))r(i,1),r(i,2),…,r(i,S(i)) in that order before leaving; two successive stages of a route are at different queues.

Queue jjj holds its njn_jnj​ customers in positions 1,…,nj1,\dots,n_j1,…,nj​. Each customer needs an exponentially distributed amount of service with unit mean. The queue supplies total service effort at rate ϕj(nj)\phi_j(n_j)ϕj​(nj​), with ϕj(n)>0\phi_j(n)>0ϕj​(n)>0 for n>0n>0n>0; a proportion γj(l,nj)\gamma_j(l,n_j)γj​(l,nj​) goes to the customer in position lll. An arriving customer takes position lll with probability δj(l,nj+1)\delta_j(l,n_j+1)δj​(l,nj​+1). For each n≥1n\ge1n≥1, γj(⋅,n)\gamma_j(\cdot,n)γj​(⋅,n) and δj(⋅,n)\delta_j(\cdot,n)δj​(⋅,n) are probability vectors on {1,…,n}\{1,\dots,n\}{1,…,n}.

The class of the customer in position lll of queue jjj is cj(l)=(tj(l),sj(l))c_j(l)=(t_j(l),s_j(l))cj​(l)=(tj​(l),sj​(l)), his type and the stage of his route. The state of queue jjj is cj=(cj(1),…,cj(nj))\mathbf c_j=(c_j(1),\dots,c_j(n_j))cj​=(cj​(1),…,cj​(nj​)) and the state of the network is C=(c1,…,cJ)\mathbf C=(\mathbf c_1,\dots,\mathbf c_J)C=(c1​,…,cJ​). Its transition rates q(C,D)q(\mathbf C,\mathbf D)q(C,D), displays (3.1)–(3.6), are the sums of the intensities of all events taking C\mathbf CC to D\mathbf DD: a departure from the system (intensity ϕj(nj)γj(l,nj)\phi_j(n_j)\gamma_j(l,n_j)ϕj​(nj​)γj​(l,nj​)), a move from position lll of queue jjj to position mmm of the next queue kkk (intensity ϕj(nj)γj(l,nj)δk(m,nk+1)\phi_j(n_j)\gamma_j(l,n_j)\delta_k(m,n_k+1)ϕj​(nj​)γj​(l,nj​)δk​(m,nk​+1)), and an arrival into position mmm of the first queue kkk of a route (intensity ν(i)δk(m,nk+1)\nu(i)\delta_k(m,n_k+1)ν(i)δk​(m,nk​+1)).

With αj(i,s)=ν(i)\alpha_j(i,s)=\nu(i)αj​(i,s)=ν(i) if r(i,s)=jr(i,s)=jr(i,s)=j and 000 otherwise, set

aj=∑i,sαj(i,s),bj−1=∑n=0∞ajn∏l=1nϕj(l),πj(cj)=bj∏l=1njαj(tj(l),sj(l))ϕj(l).a_j=\sum_{i,s}\alpha_j(i,s),\qquad b_j^{-1}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{a_j^n}{\prod_{l=1}^{n}\phi_j(l)},\qquad \pi_j(\mathbf c_j)=b_j\prod_{l=1}^{n_j}\frac{\alpha_j(t_j(l),s_j(l))}{\phi_j(l)}.aj​=i,s∑​αj​(i,s),bj−1​=n=0∑∞​∏l=1n​ϕj​(l)ajn​​,πj​(cj​)=bj​l=1∏nj​​ϕj​(l)αj​(tj​(l),sj​(l))​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 61)

If every series defining bj−1b_j^{-1}bj−1​ converges, then

π(C)=∏j=1Jπj(cj)\pi(\mathbf C)=\prod_{j=1}^{J}\pi_j(\mathbf c_j)π(C)=j=1∏J​πj​(cj​)

is positive, sums to 111 over all network states, and satisfies the equilibrium equations

π(C)∑Dq(C,D)=∑Dπ(D) q(D,C)for every C.\pi(\mathbf C)\sum_{\mathbf D}q(\mathbf C,\mathbf D)=\sum_{\mathbf D}\pi(\mathbf D)\,q(\mathbf D,\mathbf C)\quad\text{for every }\mathbf C.π(C)D∑​q(C,D)=D∑​π(D)q(D,C)for every C.

Milestones

  • Theorem 3.2 (p. 62). The time-reversed rates π(D)q(D,C)/π(C)\pi(\mathbf D)q(\mathbf D,\mathbf C)/\pi(\mathbf C)π(D)q(D,C)/π(C) are the rates of the reversed network: routes traversed backwards, γj\gamma_jγj​ and δj\delta_jδj​ interchanged.
  • Corollary 3.4 (p. 63). Queue jjj is independent of the rest of the network, is in state cj\mathbf c_jcj​ with probability πj(cj)\pi_j(\mathbf c_j)πj​(cj​), holds nnn customers with probability bjajn/∏l=1nϕj(l)b_ja_j^n/\prod_{l=1}^n\phi_j(l)bj​ajn​/∏l=1n​ϕj​(l) (3.7), and a customer in position lll is of class (i,s)(i,s)(i,s) with probability αj(i,s)/aj\alpha_j(i,s)/a_jαj​(i,s)/aj​.
  • Corollary 3.5 (p. 63). A type-iii customer reaching queue jjj at stage sss finds it in state cj\mathbf c_jcj​ with probability πj(cj)\pi_j(\mathbf c_j)πj​(cj​).
  • Lemma 3.13 (p. 89). For a multiclass queue with Poisson arrivals of rate ν(c)\nu(c)ν(c) and departure intensities ν(c)ϕc(n)\nu(c)\phi_c(\mathbf n)ν(c)ϕc​(n): reversible ⇔\Leftrightarrow⇔ quasi-reversible ⇔\Leftrightarrow⇔ Φ(n)=ϕc(n)Φ(n−ec)\Phi(\mathbf n)=\phi_c(\mathbf n)\Phi(\mathbf n-\mathbf e_c)Φ(n)=ϕc​(n)Φ(n−ec​) for some positive Φ\PhiΦ (3.26).

Significance

Theorem 3.1 gives the full joint law of a network in which routes carry memory, and its corollaries turn it into usable performance formulas: each queue behaves, in its marginal law and as seen by arriving customers, like an isolated queue fed by a Poisson stream of rate aja_jaj​, even though the actual arrival stream at queue jjj is not Poisson. Mean sojourn times along a route then follow from Little's result. Theorem 3.2 identifies the reversed process as a network of the same kind; it is the source of the departure-stream results (Corollary 3.3) and of the arrival theorem (Corollary 3.5). Lemma 3.13 isolates the condition (3.26) under which state-dependent arrival rates preserve the product form (Theorem 3.14).

The results are classical and proved in the book. None of them has a machine-checked proof: the Prove2Me catalogue holds the rate-level theorems for migration processes (Chapter 2 of Kelly–Yudovina), and open targets for the BCMP and Jackson models, which have different state descriptions. This mission adds a formal model of the position-structured multiclass network itself, with the summation over coinciding transitions that (3.2), (3.4) and (3.6) require, and product-form, reversal and arrival-theorem statements over it.

Difficulty

The obvious first attempt, detailed balance, fails: π(C)q(C,D)\pi(\mathbf C)q(\mathbf C,\mathbf D)π(C)q(C,D) and π(D)q(D,C)\pi(\mathbf D)q(\mathbf D,\mathbf C)π(D)q(D,C) differ in general, because a customer's route cannot be run backwards inside the same network (q(D,C)q(\mathbf D,\mathbf C)q(D,C) is usually 000 when q(C,D)>0q(\mathbf C,\mathbf D)>0q(C,D)>0). The equilibrium equations therefore involve, for each state, all its predecessors at once. The rates are themselves sums over coinciding transitions, so a statement about individual events does not transfer to the rates without accounting for which positions lead to the same successor state. In Lean this brings in insertion into and deletion from position lists, the relabelling of stages, and the normalization of a product over a countable space of JJJ-tuples of lists, reorganized by queue length together with the identity ∑classes at jαj=aj\sum_{\text{classes at } j}\alpha_j=a_j∑classes at j​αj​=aj​.

Formalization scope

  • Finite types and queues. Types are Fin I, queues Fin J; the book allows countably many types with ∑iν(i)<∞\sum_i\nu(i)<\infty∑i​ν(i)<∞. A network state is a function assigning to each queue a list of classes (i,s)(i,s)(i,s) with r(i,s)=jr(i,s)=jr(i,s)=j; the state space is countable and all sums over it are tsum/HasSum.
  • Indexing. Stages and list positions are 000-based in Lean; γj(l,n)\gamma_j(l,n)γj​(l,n) and δj(l,n)\delta_j(l,n)δj​(l,n) keep the book's 111-based position argument.
  • Rate level. Equilibrium means: positive, summing to 111, and satisfying the equilibrium equations (the published KellyStochasticNetworks.FullBalance). The existence of the Markov process, irreducibility and non-explosion are not formalized. "The reversed process" (Theorem 3.2) is read through the reversed rates π(D)q(D,C)/π(C)\pi(\mathbf D)q(\mathbf D,\mathbf C)/\pi(\mathbf C)π(D)q(D,C)/π(C); "the probability he finds" (Corollary 3.5) is read as a ratio of equilibrium arrival fluxes; quasi-reversibility is its rate characterization (3.8), (3.10).
  • Normalizing constants. bjb_jbj​ is defined through a tsum, which Lean sets to 000 for a divergent series; every theorem assumes the series converges, the book's "none of b1,…,bJb_1,\dots,b_Jb1​,…,bJ​ is zero".
  • No trivial instance. The goal holds for arbitrary III, JJJ, ν\nuν, routes, ϕj\phi_jϕj​, γj\gamma_jγj​, δj\delta_jδj​ subject only to the book's constraints; a proof for a single queue, or for fixed γ=δ\gamma=\deltaγ=δ disciplines, does not prove it. In Lemma 3.13 the function Φ\PhiΦ is required to be positive, since Φ≡0\Phi\equiv0Φ≡0 satisfies (3.26) for every queue.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs: list insertion/deletion lemmas for position bookkeeping, sums of products over ∏jList(⋅)\prod_j \mathrm{List}(\cdot)∏j​List(⋅), and a bijection-of-events argument for summed rates. The quasi-reversibility predicate and the reversed-rate apparatus are reusable for the closed networks of §3.4 and the symmetric queues of §3.3. Contributions are welcome on any milestone, in any order.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks, John Wiley & Sons, 1979. https://www.statslab.cam.ac.uk/~frank/BOOKS/kelly_book.html
  • F. P. Kelly, Networks of queues with customers of different types, Journal of Applied Probability 12 (1975), 542–554. https://doi.org/10.2307/3212785
  • F. Baskett, K. M. Chandy, R. R. Muntz, F. G. Palacios, Open, closed, and mixed networks of queues with different classes of customers, Journal of the ACM 22 (1975), 248–260. https://doi.org/10.1145/321879.321887
  • J. R. Jackson, Jobshop-like queueing systems, Management Science 10 (1963), 131–142. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.10.1.131
  • F. P. Kelly, E. Yudovina, Stochastic Networks, Cambridge University Press, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781139565363
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Markov ChainOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Reversibility and Stochastic Networks IV: Symmetric Queues with Gamma-Mixture Service RequirementsTextbook

Why symmetric queues

The classical product-form results for queueing networks (Jackson, Kelly, Baskett–Chandy–Muntz–Palacios) assume exponentially distributed service requirements, because then the state of a queue need not record how much service each customer has received. Real service times are rarely exponential: telephone call lengths, job sizes in time-shared computers and web transfers are far from it. Symmetric queues, introduced in §3.3 of F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks (Wiley, 1979), form the class of single queues for which the stationary distribution of the number of customers, and of their classes, depends on the service requirement distribution only through its mean. This property, insensitivity, is what makes Erlang's loss formula valid for arbitrarily distributed call lengths (Kelly, p. 79), and it is the reason processor-sharing, last-come-first-served preemptive and infinite-server stations may appear with general service in product-form networks.

Timeline. Sevastyanov (1957) proved that Erlang's loss formula holds for arbitrarily distributed call lengths. Kelly (1975, 1976) introduced queues with customers of different types whose effort and arrival-position functions coincide, and showed product form for networks of them with non-exponential service built from exponential stages; Barbour (1976) extended the method of stages; Baskett, Chandy, Muntz and Palacios (1975) gave product form for networks containing processor-sharing, LCFS-preemptive and infinite-server stations with phase-type service. Kelly's 1979 book presents the symmetric queue in the form formalized here.

Setting

A symmetric queue holds customers in positions 1,2,…,n1, 2, \dots, n1,2,…,n, where nnn is the number present. It operates as follows (Kelly, p. 72):

  1. the service requirement of a customer is a random variable whose distribution may depend on the class of the customer;
  2. a total service effort is supplied at rate ϕ(n)\phi(n)ϕ(n), with ϕ(n)>0\phi(n) > 0ϕ(n)>0 for n>0n > 0n>0;
  3. a proportion γ(l,n)\gamma(l, n)γ(l,n) of this effort, ∑l=1nγ(l,n)=1\sum_{l=1}^n \gamma(l, n) = 1∑l=1n​γ(l,n)=1, goes to the customer in position lll; when he leaves, the customers in positions l+1,…,nl+1, \dots, nl+1,…,n move down by one;
  4. an arriving customer moves into position l∈{1,…,n+1}l \in \{1, \dots, n+1\}l∈{1,…,n+1} with probability γ(l,n+1)\gamma(l, n+1)γ(l,n+1) — the same function — and the customers in positions l,…,nl, \dots, nl,…,n move up by one.

Server-sharing (γ(l,n)=1/n\gamma(l, n) = 1/nγ(l,n)=1/n), the stack (γ(n,n)=1\gamma(n, n) = 1γ(n,n)=1, last come first served preemptive), the queue with no waiting room and the infinite-server queue are examples (pp. 73–74).

Customers of class ccc arrive in a Poisson stream of rate ν(c)\nu(c)ν(c). On arrival a class-ccc customer receives a refined class (c,z)(c, z)(c,z) with probability p(c,z)p(c, z)p(c,z), ∑zp(c,z)=1\sum_z p(c, z) = 1∑z​p(c,z)=1, and then needs w(c,z)≥1w(c, z) \ge 1w(c,z)≥1 independent stages of service, each exponentially distributed with mean d(c,z)>0d(c, z) > 0d(c,z)>0. The class-ccc service requirement is therefore a mixture of gamma distributions with mean

a(c)=∑zp(c,z) w(c,z) d(c,z),a(c) = \sum_z p(c, z)\, w(c, z)\, d(c, z),a(c)=z∑​p(c,z)w(c,z)d(c,z),

and the work arriving per unit time is a=∑cν(c)a(c)a = \sum_c \nu(c) a(c)a=∑c​ν(c)a(c). The record of the customer in position lll is c(l)=(c(l),z(l),u(l))\mathbf c(l) = (c(l), z(l), u(l))c(l)=(c(l),z(l),u(l)), u(l)u(l)u(l) the stage in progress, and c=(c(1),…,c(n))\mathbf c = (\mathbf c(1), \dots, \mathbf c(n))c=(c(1),…,c(n)) is a Markov process. Its transitions are: an arrival of class (c,z)(c,z)(c,z) into position lll at stage 111, at rate ν(c)p(c,z)γ(l,n+1)\nu(c)p(c,z)\gamma(l, n+1)ν(c)p(c,z)γ(l,n+1); and, at rate ϕ(n)γ(l,n)/d(c(l),z(l))\phi(n)\gamma(l,n)/d(c(l),z(l))ϕ(n)γ(l,n)/d(c(l),z(l)), completion of the current stage of the customer in position lll, which moves him to the next stage or, after stage w(c(l),z(l))w(c(l), z(l))w(c(l),z(l)), out of the queue. The normalizing constant is

b−1=∑n=0∞an∏l=1nϕ(l).(3.15)b^{-1} = \sum_{n=0}^{\infty} \frac{a^n}{\prod_{l=1}^n \phi(l)}. \tag{3.15}b−1=n=0∑∞​∏l=1n​ϕ(l)an​.(3.15)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.8

When (3.15) converges, the distribution

π(c)=b∏l=1nν(c(l)) p(c(l),z(l)) d(c(l),z(l))ϕ(l)(3.18)\pi(\mathbf c) = b \prod_{l=1}^n \frac{\nu(c(l))\, p(c(l), z(l))\, d(c(l), z(l))}{\phi(l)} \tag{3.18}π(c)=bl=1∏n​ϕ(l)ν(c(l))p(c(l),z(l))d(c(l),z(l))​(3.18)

is the equilibrium distribution of c\mathbf cc, and under it

P(n customers)=b an∏l=1nϕ(l),P(classes c1,…,cn∣n)=∏l=1nν(cl) a(cl)a,\mathbb P(n \text{ customers}) = \frac{b\,a^n}{\prod_{l=1}^n \phi(l)}, \qquad \mathbb P(\text{classes } c_1, \dots, c_n \mid n) = \prod_{l=1}^n \frac{\nu(c_l)\, a(c_l)}{a},P(n customers)=∏l=1n​ϕ(l)ban​,P(classes c1​,…,cn​∣n)=l=1∏n​aν(cl​)a(cl​)​,

and the queue is quasi-reversible with respect to the classification ccc and to (c,z)(c, z)(c,z): from every state, the rate of arrivals of each class does not depend on the state, both for the process and its time reversal (relations (3.8) and (3.10) of p. 67).

Milestones

  • Eqs. (3.14)–(3.15): the case of one refinement per class, π(c)=b∏lν(c(l))d(c(l))/ϕ(l)\pi(\mathbf c) = b\prod_l \nu(c(l))d(c(l))/\phi(l)π(c)=b∏l​ν(c(l))d(c(l))/ϕ(l) with a=∑cν(c)d(c)w(c)a = \sum_c \nu(c)d(c)w(c)a=∑c​ν(c)d(c)w(c).
  • Eqs. (3.16)–(3.17): in that case, the law of nnn, and given nnn independent positions of class ccc with probability ν(c)d(c)w(c)/a\nu(c)d(c)w(c)/aν(c)d(c)w(c)/a and uniform stage.
  • Eq. (3.18): the equilibrium distribution under gamma-mixture service.
  • Lemma 3.9: mixtures of gamma distributions approximate, at continuity points, the distribution function of any positive random variable.

Significance

Theorem 3.8 gives the stationary law of a symmetric queue in closed form and shows that it depends on the service requirement distributions only through their means a(c)a(c)a(c). Quasi-reversibility (part (iii)) is the property that lets symmetric queues be placed in networks: Kelly's §3.2 shows that a network of quasi-reversible queues has a product-form equilibrium, so Theorem 3.8 is the single-queue input to product-form networks with processor-sharing, LCFS-preemptive and infinite-server stations and class-dependent, non-exponential service. Lemma 3.9 is the approximation step behind the extension to arbitrary service distributions (Theorem 3.10).

These results are classical and proved in the book. To our knowledge none of them is machine-checked; Mathlib has the gamma distribution and distribution functions but no queueing theory. The mission produces a formal model of the symmetric queue as a countable-state Markov process, its equilibrium distribution, the insensitive marginals and the rate characterization of quasi-reversibility, all reusable by the chapter on networks of quasi-reversible queues.

Difficulty

The obvious first attempt, detailed balance, fails: the stage process is not reversible in general, since an intermediate stage completion has no transition back. The equilibrium equations must be verified in full, over a countable state space in which a single state is reached from infinitely many others. The symmetry condition γ≡δ\gamma \equiv \deltaγ≡δ is essential and must enter the argument: without it (for first-come-first-served, say) the distribution (3.18) is false for non-exponential service. Positions shift on every arrival and departure, so the bookkeeping of which list results from which event, including coincidences when neighbouring customers have identical records, is the main formal burden. The marginal computations sum (3.18) over lists of records, where convergence must be tracked, and Lemma 3.9 needs an explicit construction of approximating gamma mixtures.

Formalization scope

  • The state is a List of customer records (class, refined class, stage); list index iii is position l=i+1l = i + 1l=i+1, and γ(l,n)\gamma(l, n)γ(l,n), ϕ(n)\phi(n)ϕ(n) keep the book's 111-based indexing. The state space consists of the lists whose records have ν(c)p(c,z)>0\nu(c)p(c,z) > 0ν(c)p(c,z)>0 and 1≤u≤w(c,z)1 \le u \le w(c, z)1≤u≤w(c,z): records of a refined class arriving at rate zero are unreachable and excluded.
  • Classes C\mathcal CC and refinements Z\mathcal ZZ are arbitrary countable types. All infinite sums are HasSum or tsum with explicit convergence hypotheses: ∑cν(c)<∞\sum_c \nu(c) < \infty∑c​ν(c)<∞ (finite exit rates, the book's standing assumption of §1.1), convergence of a(c)a(c)a(c), of aaa, and of (3.15). "Equilibrium distribution" means positive, summing to one, and satisfying the equilibrium equations with convergent series.
  • The statement is rate level: (3.18) is shown to satisfy the equilibrium equations of the stage process, and quasi-reversibility is its rate characterization (3.8), (3.10). That these describe the stationary process and its time reversal is the book's Chapter 1 and is not reformalized.
  • Trivializing readings ruled out: the goal keeps ppp, www and ddd general (not w≡1w \equiv 1w≡1, which would make the result Section 3.1's exponential case); the arrival position uses the same γ\gammaγ as the service split; and in Lemma 3.9 the approximants must be genuine gamma mixtures with integer shapes, which a point mass is not.
  • Not planned: Theorem 3.10 (arbitrary service distributions; only an outline of proof and a continuous state space the book does not construct) and Theorem 3.11 (reversibility of the number in queue, a non-Markov process).

Welcome contributions: proofs of the milestones, lemmas about List.insertIdx/List.eraseIdx bookkeeping for queues with positions, and summation over lists of records.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Reversibility and Stochastic Networks, Wiley, Chichester, 1979, §3.3, pp. 72–82. https://www.statslab.cam.ac.uk/~frank/BOOKS/kelly_book.html
  • F. P. Kelly, Networks of queues with customers of different types, Journal of Applied Probability 12 (1975), 542–554. https://www.jstor.org/journal/japplprob
  • F. P. Kelly, Networks of queues, Advances in Applied Probability 8 (1976), 416–432. https://www.jstor.org/journal/advaapplprob
  • A. D. Barbour, Networks of queues and the method of stages, Advances in Applied Probability 8 (1976), 584–591. https://www.jstor.org/journal/advaapplprob
  • B. A. Sevastyanov, An ergodic theorem for Markov processes and its application to telephone systems with refusals, Theory of Probability and its Applications 2 (1957), 104–112.
  • F. Baskett, K. M. Chandy, R. R. Muntz, F. G. Palacios, Open, closed, and mixed networks of queues with different classes of customers, Journal of the ACM 22 (1975), 248–260. https://doi.org/10.1145/321879.321887
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Discounted Dynamic Programming: An Optimal Stationary Plan Exists When the Action Set Is Essentially FiniteResearch Paper

Motivation

Sequential decisions often change the distribution of future states. A planner choosing an action today must account for both its immediate reward and the later rewards made possible by the resulting state. The mathematical question is whether an optimal rule can be chosen once and reused at every stage, even when a competing plan may randomize and use the entire observed history. In Discounted Dynamic Programming, Blackwell studies this question on general Borel state and action spaces, beyond the finite models in which a direct comparison of actions is available.

The paper distinguishes several strengths of optimality. For each distribution of the initial state, an approximately optimal stationary plan exists, but a single plan that is approximately optimal at every initial state need not exist in a general Borel problem. Essential countability of the actions restores uniform approximate stationary optimality; essential finiteness yields exact stationary optimality. These are different mathematical claims, and the mission keeps their different quantifiers visible. Blackwell 1965, pp. 227, 229, 232–234.

Setting

A state is an element sss of a nonempty standard Borel space SSS, and an action is an element aaa of a nonempty standard Borel space AAA. The transition kernel q(⋅∣s,a)q(\cdot\mid s,a)q(⋅∣s,a) gives a probability distribution for the next state after action aaa in state sss. The reward r(s,a,s′)∈Rr(s,a,s')\in\mathbb Rr(s,a,s′)∈R may depend on that next state s′s's′; it is bounded and Borel measurable. Future rewards are discounted by β\betaβ with 0≤β<10\le\beta<10≤β<1. These are the objects of Blackwell’s Sections 2–3. Blackwell 1965, pp. 227–228.

A plan π=(π1,π2,…)\pi=(\pi_1,\pi_2,\ldots)π=(π1​,π2​,…) assigns a probability distribution of actions to each possible history before a decision. At stage nnn, that history contains n−1n-1n−1 completed state-action pairs and the current state. Thus plans may randomize and depend on earlier states and actions. A Markov plan instead uses a Borel function fn:S→Af_n:S\to Afn​:S→A at each stage; a stationary plan uses the same function fff at every stage and is denoted f(∞)f^{(\infty)}f(∞). Starting from state sss, the plan has discounted expected return

I(π)(s)=∑n=1∞βn−1 Esπ[r(σn,αn,σn+1)].I(\pi)(s)=\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\beta^{n-1}\,\mathbb E_s^\pi\bigl[r(\sigma_n,\alpha_n,\sigma_{n+1})\bigr].I(π)(s)=n=1∑∞​βn−1Esπ​[r(σn​,αn​,σn+1​)].

Here σn\sigma_nσn​ and αn\alpha_nαn​ are the state and action at stage nnn. The comparison class for an optimal plan is all such plans, including randomized and history-dependent ones. Blackwell 1965, pp. 228–229.

Two actions are equivalent at state sss when they have the same reward r(s,a,s′)r(s,a,s')r(s,a,s′) for every next state s′s's′ and the same transition measure q(⋅∣s,a)q(\cdot\mid s,a)q(⋅∣s,a). An action set is essentially countable by a Markov plan (f1,f2,…)(f_1,f_2,\ldots)(f1​,f2​,…) if, for every (s,a)(s,a)(s,a), one of the actions fn(s)f_n(s)fn​(s) is equivalent to aaa at sss. It is essentially finite by that plan if SSS has a countable Borel partition (Sn)(S_n)(Sn​) such that, for s∈Sns\in S_ns∈Sn​, one of f1(s),…,fn(s)f_1(s),\ldots,f_n(s)f1​(s),…,fn​(s) is equivalent to every action aaa at sss. A finite action set is a special case. Blackwell 1965, pp. 233–234.

Formalization targets

For a probability distribution ppp on SSS and ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, (p,ε)(p,\varepsilon)(p,ε)-optimality asks for a stationary fff with

p{s:I(π)(s)>I(f(∞))(s)+ε}=0for every plan π.p\{s:I(\pi)(s)>I(f^{(\infty)})(s)+\varepsilon\}=0\qquad\text{for every plan }\pi.p{s:I(π)(s)>I(f(∞))(s)+ε}=0for every plan π.

Theorem 6(b) asserts that such an fff always exists. Under essential countability, Theorem 7(a) obtains a stronger, uniform ε\varepsilonε-optimality statement: for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there is a stationary fff with I(π)(s)≤I(f(∞))(s)+εI(\pi)(s)\le I(f^{(\infty)})(s)+\varepsilonI(π)(s)≤I(f(∞))(s)+ε for all π,s\pi,sπ,s. Its other targets identify the optimal return with the fixed point of the operator Uπu=sup⁡nTfnuU_\pi u=\sup_nT_{f_n}uUπ​u=supn​Tfn​​u and with the unique bounded solution of the optimality equation u=sup⁡a∈ATauu=\sup_{a\in A}T_auu=supa∈A​Ta​u. Blackwell 1965, pp. 232–234.

The mission’s goal is Theorem 7(b). Under essential finiteness, it asks for a stationary fff with exact optimality:

I(π)(s)≤I(f(∞))(s)for every plan π and state s.I(\pi)(s)\le I(f^{(\infty)})(s)\qquad\text{for every plan }\pi\text{ and state }s.I(π)(s)≤I(f(∞))(s)for every plan π and state s.

The milestone list also includes the paper’s operator identity, approximate selection result, contraction criterion, generated-plan comparison, and upper-bound criterion. Each has its own source index and statement. Blackwell 1965, pp. 231–234.

Significance

The exact result says that, under a condition weaker than a globally finite action set, repeated use of one measurable state-based rule matches or exceeds the return of every adaptive randomized plan. It is a structural result about what information and randomization can add to discounted control. The preceding approximate results specify what can still be guaranteed when that condition is relaxed; Blackwell’s examples show that the distinctions cannot simply be ignored. Blackwell 1965, pp. 229–230, 234.

Blackwell proved these statements in 1965. The formalization work here is to give machine-checked proofs for the Borel-space model and its full comparison class, together with reusable definitions of history-dependent kernels, returns, stationary rules, and Bellman operators. The draft theorem statements compile as Lean declarations, but their proofs remain open. The milestone results are intended to make both the final theorem and its supporting measure-theoretic objects independently usable.

Difficulty

On an uncountable Borel action space, the pointwise supremum of available action values does not automatically come with a Borel action selector. Choosing a maximizing action separately at each state may fail to define a measurable rule, and a supremum need not be attained. Also, a Markov or stationary comparison cannot by itself certify optimality against plans that depend on full histories. These issues are real in the paper’s examples: general Borel problems may lack an ε\varepsilonε-optimal plan, and a given plan need not be uniformly approximated by a Markov plan. Blackwell 1965, pp. 229–230.

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses nonempty StandardBorelSpace types for SSS and AAA. “Baire function” is read as Borel measurable on these metrizable spaces. The problem stores a Markov transition kernel, a bounded measurable real reward on S×A×SS\times A\times SS×A×S, and 0≤β<10\le\beta<10≤β<1; β=0\beta=0β=0 is included. A plan contains a probability kernel on each finite history, and the return is the actual absolutely convergent series of expected one-stage rewards. The first decision is indexed by 000 in Lean, corresponding to the paper’s index 111. The finite history law is assembled through kernel composition products, and a stationary rule is represented by deterministic kernels. The integrals and series therefore express the paper’s expected return, including the cases where the reward depends on the next state.

For the operator results, M(S)M(S)M(S) means bounded and measurable real functions. The suprema defining UπU_\piUπ​ and the optimal return are real suprema over nonempty families bounded by the reward and discount; they are used only in that setting. The abstract operator in Theorem 5 maps M(S)M(S)M(S) into itself. The action equivalence predicate uses the paper’s explicit equality of reward functions and transition laws; the later “i.e.” phrasing on p. 234 is weaker when interpreted as equality of operators alone. A partition piece may be empty, and Lean’s piece nnn corresponds to the paper’s Sn+1S_{n+1}Sn+1​, with rules f1,…,fn+1f_1,\ldots,f_{n+1}f1​,…,fn+1​.

An optimality claim here always compares with every randomized history-dependent plan. Restricting that quantifier to Markov or stationary plans would trivialize the target. A complete development needs measure-theoretic facts about history laws and their bounded integrals, the discounted series, measurable partitions and selections, and the sup-norm contraction of bounded Borel functions. The history-law and bounded-function infrastructure can be reused outside this mission. Contributions to those foundations and to the numbered milestone theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • David Blackwell, Discounted Dynamic Programming, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 36(1), 226–235, 1965. DOI: 10.1214/aoms/1177700285.
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dimensioning Large Call Centers III: Asymptotically Optimal Staffing in the Quality-Driven RegimeResearch Paper

Motivation

How many agents should a call center staff? Telephone call centers employ millions of people, and staffing is their largest cost, so the question is asked every half hour of every day (Gans, Koole & Mandelbaum, 2003). The classical model is the M/M/N (Erlang-C) queue: calls arrive at rate λ\lambdaλ, service times are exponential with mean 1/μ1/\mu1/μ, and NNN agents serve in parallel. Practitioners use the square-root safety staffing rule N≈λ/μ+yλ/μN \approx \lambda/\mu + y\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}N≈λ/μ+yλ/μ​, which Halfin and Whitt (1981) justified in the regime where the probability of waiting stays bounded away from 000 and 111.

Borst, Mandelbaum and Reiman (CWI Report PNA-R0015, 2000; published as Operations Research 52(1), 2004) asked when such a rule is actually optimal: given a staffing cost and a waiting cost, which staffing level minimizes total cost as the arrival rate grows? They identified three regimes according to how the two costs compare. This mission formalizes their third case, the quality-driven regime, in which waiting is so expensive relative to staffing that the optimal number of agents exceeds the offered load by more than any fixed multiple of its square root.

Setting

Fix a service rate μ>0\mu > 0μ>0. For every arrival rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 a waiting-cost function DλD_\lambdaDλ​ assigns cost Dλ(t)D_\lambda(t)Dλ​(t) to a wait of ttt time units; it satisfies Dλ(0)=0D_\lambda(0) = 0Dλ​(0)=0, is strictly increasing, and t↦Dλ(t)e−θtt \mapsto D_\lambda(t)e^{-\theta t}t↦Dλ​(t)e−θt is integrable on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) for every θ>0\theta > 0θ>0. A staffing cost FFF, defined for real N>0N > 0N>0, is convex and strictly increasing.

For an integer N>λ/μN > \lambda/\muN>λ/μ the probability of waiting is the Erlang-C formula

π(N,ν)=νNN!{(1−ν/N)∑n=0N−1νnn!+νNN!}−1,ν=λ/μ,\pi(N,\nu) = \frac{\nu^N}{N!}\Bigl\{(1-\nu/N)\sum_{n=0}^{N-1}\frac{\nu^n}{n!} + \frac{\nu^N}{N!}\Bigr\}^{-1},\qquad \nu = \lambda/\mu,π(N,ν)=N!νN​{(1−ν/N)n=0∑N−1​n!νn​+N!νN​}−1,ν=λ/μ,

the expected waiting cost of a delayed customer is G(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞Dλ(t)e−(Nμ−λ)t dtG(N,\lambda) = (N\mu-\lambda)\int_0^\infty D_\lambda(t)e^{-(N\mu-\lambda)t}\,dtG(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞​Dλ​(t)e−(Nμ−λ)tdt, and the total cost per unit time is C(N,λ)=F(N)+λ π(N,λ/μ) G(N,λ)C(N,\lambda) = F(N) + \lambda\,\pi(N,\lambda/\mu)\,G(N,\lambda)C(N,λ)=F(N)+λπ(N,λ/μ)G(N,λ). An optimal staffing level Nλ∗N^*_\lambdaNλ∗​ minimizes C(⋅,λ)C(\cdot,\lambda)C(⋅,λ) over the integers N>λ/μN > \lambda/\muN>λ/μ.

Write Nλ(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μN_\lambda(x) = \lambda/\mu + x\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}Nλ​(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μ​, and for x>0x > 0x>0 put Fλ(x)=F(Nλ(x))−F(λ/μ)F_\lambda(x) = F(N_\lambda(x)) - F(\lambda/\mu)Fλ​(x)=F(Nλ​(x))−F(λ/μ), Gλ(x)=λG(Nλ(x),λ)G_\lambda(x) = \lambda G(N_\lambda(x),\lambda)Gλ​(x)=λG(Nλ​(x),λ), and πλ(x)=H(Nλ(x),λ/μ)\pi_\lambda(x) = H(N_\lambda(x),\lambda/\mu)πλ​(x)=H(Nλ​(x),λ/μ), where H(M,α)={α∫0∞e−αtt(1+t)M−1dt}−1H(M,\alpha) = \{\alpha\int_0^\infty e^{-\alpha t}t(1+t)^{M-1}dt\}^{-1}H(M,α)={α∫0∞​e−αtt(1+t)M−1dt}−1 extends the Erlang-C formula to real MMM. The normalized cost is Cλ(x)=Fλ(x)+πλ(x)Gλ(x)C_\lambda(x) = F_\lambda(x) + \pi_\lambda(x)G_\lambda(x)Cλ​(x)=Fλ​(x)+πλ​(x)Gλ​(x), and a surrogate cost is C[z;F^,π^,G^]=F^(z)+π^(z)G^(z)C[z;\hat F,\hat\pi,\hat G] = \hat F(z) + \hat\pi(z)\hat G(z)C[z;F^,π^,G^]=F^(z)+π^(z)G^(z). Rounding is measured by Sλ(x)=min⁡{C(⌊Nλ(x)⌋,λ),C(⌈Nλ(x)⌉,λ)}S_\lambda(x) = \min\{C(\lfloor N_\lambda(x)\rfloor,\lambda), C(\lceil N_\lambda(x)\rceil,\lambda)\}Sλ​(x)=min{C(⌊Nλ​(x)⌋,λ),C(⌈Nλ​(x)⌉,λ)}.

Two special functions appear. The Halfin–Whitt delay function is P(x)=1/(1+x/h(−x))P(x) = 1/(1 + x/h(-x))P(x)=1/(1+x/h(−x)) with h=ϕ/(1−Φ)h = \phi/(1-\Phi)h=ϕ/(1−Φ) the standard normal hazard rate. The Stirling-type approximation is

Qλ(x)=exp⁡{Nλ(x)[1−rλ(x)+log⁡rλ(x)]}2πNλ(x) (1−rλ(x)),rλ(x)=λ/μNλ(x).Q_\lambda(x) = \frac{\exp\{N_\lambda(x)[1 - r_\lambda(x) + \log r_\lambda(x)]\}}{\sqrt{2\pi N_\lambda(x)}\,(1-r_\lambda(x))},\qquad r_\lambda(x) = \frac{\lambda/\mu}{N_\lambda(x)}.Qλ​(x)=2πNλ​(x)​(1−rλ​(x))exp{Nλ​(x)[1−rλ​(x)+logrλ​(x)]}​,rλ​(x)=Nλ​(x)λ/μ​.

Asymptotic relations are limits of ratios as λ→∞\lambda\to\inftyλ→∞: aλ≈∞bλa_\lambda \stackrel{\infty}{\approx} b_\lambdaaλ​≈∞bλ​ means aλ/bλ→1a_\lambda/b_\lambda \to 1aλ​/bλ​→1, and aλ≪∞bλa_\lambda \stackrel{\infty}{\ll} b_\lambdaaλ​≪∞​bλ​ means aλ/bλ→0a_\lambda/b_\lambda \to 0aλ​/bλ​→0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1

Assume the regime is quality-driven, display (27): Fλ(κ)≪∞Gλ(κ)F_\lambda(\kappa) \stackrel{\infty}{\ll} G_\lambda(\kappa)Fλ​(κ)≪∞​Gλ​(κ) for every κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0. Let yλ∗y^*_\lambdayλ∗​ minimize Fλ(y)+Qλ(y)Gλ(y)F_\lambda(y) + Q_\lambda(y)G_\lambda(y)Fλ​(y)+Qλ​(y)Gλ​(y) over y>0y > 0y>0. Then

lim⁡λ→∞Sλ(yλ∗)−F(λ/μ)C(Nλ∗,λ)−F(λ/μ)=1.\lim_{\lambda\to\infty}\frac{S_\lambda(y^*_\lambda) - F(\lambda/\mu)}{C(N^*_\lambda,\lambda) - F(\lambda/\mu)} = 1.λ→∞lim​C(Nλ∗​,λ)−F(λ/μ)Sλ​(yλ∗​)−F(λ/μ)​=1.

The statement fixes no constants and no rate; it asserts only that rounding the surrogate optimum loses a vanishing fraction of the excess cost.

Milestones

In attack order: Lemma C.1 (GλG_\lambdaGλ​ strictly convex decreasing); the identity H(N,ν)=π(N,ν)H(N,\nu) = \pi(N,\nu)H(N,ν)=π(N,ν) at integer NNN (Section 3, p. 12); Lemma 3.1 and Lemma 3.2; Corollary 3.3 (the asymptotic optimality criterion); Lemma B.1 (PPP strictly convex decreasing); display (15); Lemma 4.1 (Halfin and Whitt); and the first statement of Lemma 4.2, πλ(xλ)≈∞Qλ(xλ)\pi_\lambda(x_\lambda) \stackrel{\infty}{\approx} Q_\lambda(x_\lambda)πλ​(xλ​)≈∞Qλ​(xλ​) whenever xλ→∞x_\lambda\to\inftyxλ​→∞.

Significance

Theorem 7.1 completes the paper's picture of optimal staffing. In the rationalized regime the square-root rule with the Halfin–Whitt function PPP is optimal; in the efficiency-driven regime staffing barely exceeds the load; in the quality-driven regime the staffing excess outgrows λ/μ\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}λ/μ​ and PPP must be replaced by the Stirling-type expression QλQ_\lambdaQλ​. The theorem gives a one-dimensional minimization whose solution is asymptotically optimal, which turns a discrete optimization over NNN into a smooth problem, and it marks the boundary of validity of square-root staffing.

The result is proved in the paper; it is not formalized anywhere to our knowledge. A complete development formalizes the Section 3 framework (shared with the other regimes of the same paper), the convexity of GλG_\lambdaGλ​ and of PPP, the Halfin–Whitt limit for the continuous extension πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​, and the Stirling-type asymptotics of the Erlang-C formula. Each of these is a reusable piece of queueing theory in Lean.

Difficulty

The regime theorem itself is short once the framework is in place; the weight lies in the analytic lemmas. Lemma 4.2 requires uniform asymptotics of πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​ at a staffing excess xλx_\lambdaxλ​ that may grow at any rate, from barely faster than a constant to faster than λ\sqrt{\lambda}λ​, where neither the central-limit picture of Halfin and Whitt nor a single Stirling expansion covers all cases. Lemma 4.1 concerns the continuous extension πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​ at non-integer server counts, whereas Halfin and Whitt's theorem is about integer ones. The natural first idea, that the goal follows from Corollary 3.3 by plugging in Lemma 4.2, does not apply directly: Lemma 4.2 only covers staffing excesses that tend to infinity, and nothing in the definition of the true optimum xλ∗x^*_\lambdaxλ∗​ or the surrogate optimum yλ∗y^*_\lambdayλ∗​ says that they do.

Formalization scope

Lean represents λ\lambdaλ as a positive real, and λ→∞\lambda\to\inftyλ→∞ is the filter atTop on R\mathbb{R}R with μ\muμ fixed. The standing assumptions on μ\muμ and DλD_\lambdaDλ​ are the structure WaitModel; FFF is a function argument with hypotheses ConvexOn and StrictMonoOn on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞). Staffing levels NNN are natural numbers. Minimizers (Nλ∗N^*_\lambdaNλ∗​, xλ∗x^*_\lambdaxλ∗​, zλ∗z^*_\lambdazλ∗​, yλ∗y^*_\lambdayλ∗​) are function arguments with minimality hypotheses at every λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, so every statement holds for every choice among ties. Liminf and limsup relations are stated through Filter.Frequently, avoiding boundedness side conditions.

The queue itself (Poisson arrivals, waiting-time law) is not formalized: the paper's analysis and all its theorems concern the closed-form cost C(N,λ)C(N,\lambda)C(N,λ) with the Erlang-C formula.

Conventions committed to: (i) the goal adds the hypothesis G(N,λ)→∞G(N,\lambda)\to\inftyG(N,λ)→∞ as N↓λ/μN\downarrow\lambda/\muN↓λ/μ, which the paper asserts on p. 12 to show the continuous optimum exists but which does not follow from its standing assumptions (it holds exactly when DλD_\lambdaDλ​ is unbounded); (ii) in SλS_\lambdaSλ​ the floor term is omitted when ⌊Nλ(x)⌋≤λ/μ\lfloor N_\lambda(x)\rfloor \le \lambda/\mu⌊Nλ​(x)⌋≤λ/μ, since the cost is undefined at unstable levels; (iii) the integrability of Dλ(t)e−θtD_\lambda(t)e^{-\theta t}Dλ​(t)e−θt is explicit, because a Lean integral of a non-integrable function is 000; (iv) P(0)=1P(0) = 1P(0)=1, the value of formula (11) at 000; (v) display (15) is stated for b>0b > 0b>0, since the ratio aλ/ba_\lambda/baλ​/b is undefined at b=0b = 0b=0. The instance μ=1\mu = 1μ=1, F(N)=cNF(N) = cNF(N)=cN, Dλ(t)=aλ tD_\lambda(t) = a\sqrt{\lambda}\,tDλ​(t)=aλ​t (Section 9) satisfies every hypothesis of the goal, so the goal is not vacuous; taking πλ\pi_\lambdaπλ​ or GλG_\lambdaGλ​ at Lean default values is ruled out by these explicit domain conditions.

Only the first statement of Lemma 4.2 is a milestone: the second, πλ(xλ)≈Q(xλ)\pi_\lambda(x_\lambda)\approx Q(x_\lambda)πλ​(xλ​)≈Q(xλ​) under xλ≤sup⁡λ1/6x_\lambda \stackrel{\sup}{\le} \lambda^{1/6}xλ​≤sup​λ1/6, fails as printed at xλ=λ1/6x_\lambda = \lambda^{1/6}xλ​=λ1/6. Contributions on the Erlang-C asymptotics, the normal hazard rate, and Laplace transforms of increasing functions are welcome and reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • S. Borst, A. Mandelbaum, M. I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, CWI Report PNA-R0015, 2000 (the version formalized here; every index and page cited in this mission is the report's).
  • S. Borst, A. Mandelbaum, M. I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, Operations Research 52(1):17–34, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1030.0081
  • S. Halfin, W. Whitt, Heavy-Traffic Limits for Queues with Many Exponential Servers, Operations Research 29(3):567–588, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.29.3.567
  • N. Gans, G. Koole, A. Mandelbaum, Telephone Call Centers: Tutorial, Review, and Research Prospects, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 5(2):79–141, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.5.2.79.16071
24 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dimensioning Large Call Centers II: Asymptotically Optimal Staffing in the Efficiency-Driven RegimeResearch Paper

Why staffing large call centers is a mathematical question

A call center must choose enough servers to limit waiting while paying for every server it staffs. When arrivals are heavy, small changes in the number of servers can change the probability of delay substantially. Borst, Mandelbaum, and Reiman study how to make this choice when the arrival rate grows and the costs of staffing and waiting need not grow at the same rate. Their CWI report treats several regimes within one queueing model. This mission concerns the efficiency-driven regime, where the incremental staffing cost eventually dominates the conditional waiting cost at every fixed positive square-root staffing offset. The resulting rule chooses an offset by optimizing a simpler cost that treats the probability of waiting as one.

The result is useful when the staffing-cost and waiting-cost primitives change with system scale. It says that the simplified choice still attains the optimal total cost asymptotically, even though the actual staffing decision is an integer and the simplified problem uses a real variable. The report states this as Theorem 6.1 on printed page 19, with its interpretation of asymptotic optimality supplied by Corollary 3.3 on printed page 14.

The Erlang-C cost model

Customers arrive at rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and receive exponential service at rate μ>0\mu>0μ>0 per server. The service rate μ\muμ is fixed as λ\lambdaλ grows. For an integer number of servers N>λ/μN>\lambda/\muN>λ/μ, the Erlang-C delay probability π(N,λ/μ)\pi(N,\lambda/\mu)π(N,λ/μ) is the explicit finite-sum expression in Section 2 of the report. A customer who waits has an exponential waiting time with rate Nμ−λN\mu-\lambdaNμ−λ. Let Dλ(t)D_\lambda(t)Dλ​(t) be the cost of a wait of length ttt. It is strictly increasing on t≥0t\ge0t≥0, satisfies Dλ(0)=0D_\lambda(0)=0Dλ​(0)=0, and has finite exponential expectation at every positive rate. The resulting conditional waiting cost is

G(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞Dλ(t)e−(Nμ−λ)t dt.G(N,\lambda)=(N\mu-\lambda)\int_0^\infty D_\lambda(t)e^{-(N\mu-\lambda)t}\,dt.G(N,λ)=(Nμ−λ)∫0∞​Dλ​(t)e−(Nμ−λ)tdt.

The staffing cost F(N)F(N)F(N) is one fixed, convex, strictly increasing function of the server count. Its continuous extension is evaluated at real N>0N>0N>0. Total cost per unit of time at a stable integer level is

C(N,λ)=F(N)+λπ(N,λ/μ)G(N,λ).C(N,\lambda)=F(N)+\lambda\pi(N,\lambda/\mu)G(N,\lambda).C(N,λ)=F(N)+λπ(N,λ/μ)G(N,λ).

Write Nλ∗N^*_\lambdaNλ∗​ for any minimizing stable integer level. Ties are permitted. For a positive real offset xxx, define Nλ(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μN_\lambda(x)=\lambda/\mu+x\sqrt{\lambda/\mu}Nλ​(x)=λ/μ+xλ/μ​, Fλ(x)=F(Nλ(x))−F(λ/μ)F_\lambda(x)=F(N_\lambda(x))-F(\lambda/\mu)Fλ​(x)=F(Nλ​(x))−F(λ/μ), and Gλ(x)=λG(Nλ(x),λ)G_\lambda(x)=\lambda G(N_\lambda(x),\lambda)Gλ​(x)=λG(Nλ​(x),λ). The report extends Erlang-C continuously to πλ(x)\pi_\lambda(x)πλ​(x) and writes the incremental continuous objective as Cλ(x)=Fλ(x)+πλ(x)Gλ(x)C_\lambda(x)=F_\lambda(x)+\pi_\lambda(x)G_\lambda(x)Cλ​(x)=Fλ​(x)+πλ​(x)Gλ​(x). These definitions and the integer-extension identity are from Section 3, printed pages 11–12.

Formalization targets

The report defines the efficiency-driven regime by

for every κ>0,lim⁡λ→∞Fλ(κ)Gλ(κ)=+∞.\text{for every }\kappa>0,\qquad \lim_{\lambda\to\infty}\frac{F_\lambda(\kappa)}{G_\lambda(\kappa)}=+\infty.for every κ>0,λ→∞lim​Gλ​(κ)Fλ​(κ)​=+∞.

For each λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, choose yλ∗>0y^*_\lambda>0yλ∗​>0 to minimize Fλ(y)+Gλ(y)F_\lambda(y)+G_\lambda(y)Fλ​(y)+Gλ​(y) over y>0y>0y>0. Let Sλ(y)S_\lambda(y)Sλ​(y) be the smaller cost of the stable integer levels immediately below and above Nλ(y)N_\lambda(y)Nλ​(y); if the lower one is unstable, use the upper one. The goal, Theorem 6.1 together with Corollary 3.3, is

lim⁡λ→∞Sλ(yλ∗)−F(λ/μ)C(Nλ∗,λ)−F(λ/μ)=1.\lim_{\lambda\to\infty} \frac{S_\lambda(y^*_\lambda)-F(\lambda/\mu)} {C(N^*_\lambda,\lambda)-F(\lambda/\mu)}=1.λ→∞lim​C(Nλ∗​,λ)−F(λ/μ)Sλ​(yλ∗​)−F(λ/μ)​=1.

The milestone path includes the convexity of the conditional waiting cost (Lemma C.1), the agreement of the continuous Erlang-C extension with its integer formula, the two approximation lemmas and their corollary (Lemmas 3.1–3.2 and Corollary 3.3), the convex staffing-cost comparison of equation (13), and all three clauses of the Halfin–Whitt limit in Lemma 4.1. This ordering follows the objects each later statement uses.

What the result gives

The theorem certifies a staffing rule defined by a one-variable surrogate rather than the exact Erlang-C probability in the objective. Its guarantee concerns the incremental total cost above the unavoidable baseline F(λ/μ)F(\lambda/\mu)F(λ/μ), which is the economically relevant quantity when comparing two near-minimal stable staffing levels. The ratio tends to one, so the theorem is stronger than a claim that the two costs merely have the same growth order. The source also presents other regimes with different surrogates; their conclusions are separate targets in this series.

The paper proves the mathematical theorem. This mission asks for a Lean proof of its closed-form model and the surrounding lemmas. The complete development would make the report's approximation framework reusable for later results that combine a continuous queueing approximation, a surrogate minimizer, and integer rounding. It would also expose the exact assumptions needed to pass between real and integer staffing levels. No machine-checked proof of this report's Theorem 6.1 is claimed here.

Where the difficulty lies

The simple objective replaces the delay probability πλ(y)\pi_\lambda(y)πλ​(y) by one. That replacement is accurate near zero offset, but the minimizing offset itself changes with λ\lambdaλ. Pointwise asymptotics at a fixed positive offset do not directly control the value of an objective at its moving minimizer. The proof therefore has to relate the regime assumption to the location of the relevant minimizers before using the Halfin–Whitt limit. Integer rounding introduces another boundary issue: when Nλ(y)N_\lambda(y)Nλ​(y) is just above λ/μ\lambda/\muλ/μ, its floor need not be stable, so evaluating the ordinary Erlang-C formula there would compare the target against a meaningless cost. These difficulties are visible already in the statements of Theorem 6.1 and Lemma 3.2.

Formalization scope and conventions

Lean represents λ\lambdaλ, μ\muμ, offsets, and costs as real numbers; arrival-rate limits use the real filter at +∞+\infty+∞. Staffing counts are natural numbers. The service rate is positive and fixed. A WaitModel packages strict increase and normalization of DλD_\lambdaDλ​ on nonnegative waits together with integrability against every positive exponential rate. This integrability expresses the report's finiteness assumption for GGG and prevents a nonintegrable real integral from silently evaluating to zero. The hypotheses on FFF are convexity and strict increase on positive real staffing levels; FFF does not depend on λ\lambdaλ.

The report asserts that G(N,λ)G(N,\lambda)G(N,λ) diverges as NNN decreases to λ/μ\lambda/\muλ/μ, although the stated assumptions permit bounded increasing waiting penalties for which that assertion fails. The goal therefore includes this explicit divergence hypothesis, which also supports existence of the continuous minimizer used in the report's argument. The integer optimum and the surrogate optimum are functions constrained to be minimizers at every positive arrival rate. They cannot be arbitrary choices that make the conclusion vacuous. The continuous optimum appears only in the framework milestones; it is not a hypothesis of Theorem 6.1.

All formulas are total Lean functions. Their values at λ≤0\lambda\le0λ≤0, unstable integer counts, nonpositive offsets, or invalid parameters to the continuous Erlang-C integral have no queueing interpretation. Every theorem using them constrains its relevant inputs. The definition of SλS_\lambdaSλ​ ignores an unstable floor and uses the stable ceiling. At a positive offset and arrival rate this ceiling is above offered load. The Gaussian density, its cumulative integral, the hazard rate, and the delay function use the explicit formulas of Section 4; the value of the delay function at zero is the continuous extension needed by Lemma 4.1.

The queue's stochastic construction is outside this mission. The formal objects are the report's cost formulas and asymptotic comparisons, not a continuous-time Markov chain. Useful contributions include proofs of the special-function limit, convexity of conditional waiting cost, the integer-extension identity, and the reusable approximation lemmas. The regime condition is the full limit in equation (23); weakening it to an unrelated boundedness condition would change the theorem.

Selected references

  • Sem Borst, Avi Mandelbaum, and Martin I. Reiman, Dimensioning Large Call Centers, CWI Report PNA-R0015, 2000. Report PDF. Theorem 6.1, printed p. 19; Corollary 3.3, printed p. 14; Lemma 4.1, printed p. 15; Lemma C.1, printed p. 40.
22 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationMachine LearningOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Variance-based Regularization with Convex Objectives IV: Fast Rates for Approximate Robust Minimizers under a Growth ConditionResearch Paper

Motivation

In stochastic optimization and statistical learning one chooses a parameter θ\thetaθ from a set Θ⊆Rd\Theta\subseteq\mathbb R^dΘ⊆Rd to make the risk R(θ)=EP[ℓ(θ;X)]R(\theta)=\mathbb E_P[\ell(\theta;X)]R(θ)=EP​[ℓ(θ;X)] small, having seen only a sample X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ from PPP. Generalization bounds suggest trading empirical risk against its standard deviation, but the variance-penalized objective is non-convex even for convex losses. Duchi and Namkoong (arXiv:1610.02581v3) replace it by the robustly regularized risk, the worst-case expected loss over a χ2\chi^2χ2-divergence ball around the empirical distribution. This objective is convex whenever ℓ\ellℓ is, and it agrees with the variance-penalized objective up to a small error.

When the risk has curvature near its minimizers, empirical risk minimization attains rates faster than 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ (Bartlett, Bousquet and Mendelson 2005; Shapiro, Dentcheva and Ruszczyński 2009). Section 4.1 of the paper asks whether minimizers of the robust risk, which carry an extra variance-dependent penalty of order ρ/n\sqrt{\rho/n}ρ/n​, keep these fast rates. Its Theorem 5 answers yes, and does so for approximate minimizers, which is what iterative solvers return.

Setting

A loss ℓ:Rd×X→R\ell:\mathbb R^d\times\mathcal X\to\mathbb Rℓ:Rd×X→R is fixed, with ℓ(⋅;x)\ell(\cdot;x)ℓ(⋅;x) convex and LLL-Lipschitz on a convex set Θ\ThetaΘ for every xxx, and ℓ(θ;⋅)\ell(\theta;\cdot)ℓ(θ;⋅) integrable. The risk is R(θ)=EP[ℓ(θ;X)]R(\theta)=\mathbb E_P[\ell(\theta;X)]R(θ)=EP​[ℓ(θ;X)].

For a radius ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0, the χ2\chi^2χ2 ball around the empirical distribution P^n\widehat P_nPn​ is the set of weight vectors

Pn={p∈R+n:12∥np−1∥22≤ρ, ⟨1,p⟩=1},\mathcal P_n=\Big\{p\in\mathbb R^n_+:\tfrac12\|np-\mathbf 1\|_2^2\le\rho,\ \langle\mathbf 1,p\rangle=1\Big\},Pn​={p∈R+n​:21​∥np−1∥22​≤ρ, ⟨1,p⟩=1},

and the robust risk is Rn(θ,Pn)=sup⁡p∈Pn∑ipi ℓ(θ;Xi)R_n(\theta,\mathcal P_n)=\sup_{p\in\mathcal P_n}\sum_i p_i\,\ell(\theta;X_i)Rn​(θ,Pn​)=supp∈Pn​​∑i​pi​ℓ(θ;Xi​).

For ϵ≥0\epsilon\ge0ϵ≥0 the ϵ\epsilonϵ-suboptimal sets of the risk and of the robust risk are

S⋆ϵ={θ∈Θ:R(θ)≤inf⁡ΘR+ϵ},S^⋆ϵ={θ∈Θ:Rn(θ,Pn)≤inf⁡ΘRn(⋅,Pn)+ϵ},S_\star^\epsilon=\{\theta\in\Theta:R(\theta)\le\inf_\Theta R+\epsilon\},\qquad\widehat S_\star^\epsilon=\{\theta\in\Theta:R_n(\theta,\mathcal P_n)\le\inf_\Theta R_n(\cdot,\mathcal P_n)+\epsilon\},S⋆ϵ​={θ∈Θ:R(θ)≤Θinf​R+ϵ},S⋆ϵ​={θ∈Θ:Rn​(θ,Pn​)≤Θinf​Rn​(⋅,Pn​)+ϵ},

with S⋆=S⋆0S_\star=S_\star^0S⋆​=S⋆0​ the solution set and πS⋆\pi_{S_\star}πS⋆​​ the Euclidean projection onto it. The risk satisfies a growth condition of order γ>1\gamma>1γ>1 if, for some λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and r>0r>0r>0,

R(θ)−inf⁡ΘR ≥ λ dist(θ,S⋆)γwhenever dist(θ,S⋆)≤r.(26)R(\theta)-\inf_\Theta R\ \ge\ \lambda\,\mathrm{dist}(\theta,S_\star)^\gamma\quad\text{whenever }\mathrm{dist}(\theta,S_\star)\le r.\tag{26}R(θ)−Θinf​R ≥ λdist(θ,S⋆​)γwhenever dist(θ,S⋆​)≤r.(26)

The complexity of the problem enters through the localized class {x↦ℓ(θ;x)−ℓ(πS⋆(θ);x):θ∈A}\{x\mapsto\ell(\theta;x)-\ell(\pi_{S_\star}(\theta);x):\theta\in A\}{x↦ℓ(θ;x)−ℓ(πS⋆​​(θ);x):θ∈A} and its empirical Rademacher complexity Rn(A)=Eε[sup⁡θ∈A1n∑iεi(ℓ(θ;Xi)−ℓ(πS⋆(θ);Xi))]\mathfrak R_n(A)=\mathbb E_\varepsilon\big[\sup_{\theta\in A}\frac1n\sum_i\varepsilon_i(\ell(\theta;X_i)-\ell(\pi_{S_\star}(\theta);X_i))\big]Rn​(A)=Eε​[supθ∈A​n1​∑i​εi​(ℓ(θ;Xi​)−ℓ(πS⋆​​(θ);Xi​))], with independent uniform signs εi∈{±1}\varepsilon_i\in\{\pm1\}εi​∈{±1}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5 (p. 19)

For t>0t>0t>0, ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0, and 0<ϵ≤12λrγ0<\epsilon\le\frac12\lambda r^\gamma0<ϵ≤21​λrγ satisfying

ϵ≥(28γLγλ)1γ−1(ρn)γ2(γ−1)andϵ2≥2 E[Rn(S⋆2ϵ)]+L(2ϵλ)1γ2tn,(27)\epsilon\ge\Big(2\frac{8^\gamma L^\gamma}{\lambda}\Big)^{\frac1{\gamma-1}}\Big(\frac\rho n\Big)^{\frac\gamma{2(\gamma-1)}}\quad\text{and}\quad\frac\epsilon2\ge2\,\mathbb E[\mathfrak R_n(S_\star^{2\epsilon})]+L\Big(\frac{2\epsilon}\lambda\Big)^{\frac1\gamma}\sqrt{\frac{2t}n},\tag{27}ϵ≥(2λ8γLγ​)γ−11​(nρ​)2(γ−1)γ​and2ϵ​≥2E[Rn​(S⋆2ϵ​)]+L(λ2ϵ​)γ1​n2t​​,(27) P(S^⋆ϵ⊂S⋆2ϵ) ≥ 1−e−t.\mathbb P\big(\widehat S_\star^\epsilon\subset S_\star^{2\epsilon}\big)\ \ge\ 1-e^{-t}.P(S⋆ϵ​⊂S⋆2ϵ​) ≥ 1−e−t.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Localization (p. 44). Under (26), S⋆2ϵS_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆2ϵ​ lies in {θ∈Θ:dist(θ,S⋆)≤(2ϵ/λ)1/γ}\{\theta\in\Theta:\mathrm{dist}(\theta,S_\star)\le(2\epsilon/\lambda)^{1/\gamma}\}{θ∈Θ:dist(θ,S⋆​)≤(2ϵ/λ)1/γ}.
  2. Theorem 1, upper half of (10) (p. 7). sup⁡p∈Pn⟨p,z⟩−zˉ≤2ρsn2/n\sup_{p\in\mathcal P_n}\langle p,z\rangle-\bar z\le\sqrt{2\rho s_n^2/n}supp∈Pn​​⟨p,z⟩−zˉ≤2ρsn2​/n​ for every z∈Rnz\in\mathbb R^nz∈Rn.
  3. Claim E.1 (p. 44). If S^⋆ϵ⊄S⋆2ϵ\widehat S_\star^\epsilon\not\subset S_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆ϵ​⊂S⋆2ϵ​, the localized deviation Δn\Delta_nΔn​ plus a variance term reaches ϵ\epsilonϵ somewhere on S⋆2ϵS_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆2ϵ​.
  4. Display (43) (p. 45). P(S^⋆ϵ⊄S⋆2ϵ)≤P(sup⁡S⋆2ϵΔn≥ϵ/2)\mathbb P(\widehat S_\star^\epsilon\not\subset S_\star^{2\epsilon})\le\mathbb P(\sup_{S_\star^{2\epsilon}}\Delta_n\ge\epsilon/2)P(S⋆ϵ​⊂S⋆2ϵ​)≤P(supS⋆2ϵ​​Δn​≥ϵ/2).
  5. Concentration (p. 45). P(sup⁡S⋆2ϵΔn≥2E[Rn(S⋆2ϵ)]+u)≤exp⁡(−nu22L2(λ2ϵ)2/γ)\mathbb P(\sup_{S_\star^{2\epsilon}}\Delta_n\ge2\mathbb E[\mathfrak R_n(S_\star^{2\epsilon})]+u)\le\exp(-\frac{nu^2}{2L^2}(\frac\lambda{2\epsilon})^{2/\gamma})P(supS⋆2ϵ​​Δn​≥2E[Rn​(S⋆2ϵ​)]+u)≤exp(−2L2nu2​(2ϵλ​)2/γ).

Significance

The theorem says that the variance penalty implicit in the robust objective does not cost the fast rates available under curvature. The ρ\rhoρ-dependent condition in (27) is of order (ρ/n)γ/(2(γ−1))(\rho/n)^{\gamma/(2(\gamma-1))}(ρ/n)γ/(2(γ−1)), which for quadratic growth (γ=2\gamma=2γ=2) is ρ/n\rho/nρ/n, the same order as the localized complexity term in typical parametric problems. Corollary 4.1 of the paper derives explicit rates of order dnlog⁡nd+tn+ρn\frac dn\log\frac nd+\frac tn+\frac\rho nnd​logdn​+nt​+nρ​ from it for a unique minimizer. The result applies to ϵ\epsilonϵ-approximate minimizers, so it covers the output of the stochastic-gradient methods used to solve the robust problem.

The result is proved in the paper (Appendix E). None of it is formalized: no statement about growth conditions, localized deviations of a robust objective, or fast rates for robust minimizers is on Prove2Me. A formal proof would check the printed constants, settle the boundary case ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0 (see below), and produce a localization lemma and a reduction from approximate robust minimizers to empirical processes that apply to other estimators.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at two points. First, a uniform deviation bound over all of Θ\ThetaΘ gives only the 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ rate: the speed-up comes from localizing to S⋆2ϵS_\star^{2\epsilon}S⋆2ϵ​, which requires transferring the growth condition, assumed only within distance rrr of S⋆S_\starS⋆​, to every 2ϵ2\epsilon2ϵ-suboptimal point by convexity. Second, the robust risk is not an empirical average, so standard comparisons between empirical and population minimizers do not apply. Claim E.1 handles this by moving along the segment from a bad approximate minimizer to its projection, which needs the projection to be preserved along that segment (a normal-cone property of πS⋆\pi_{S_\star}πS⋆​​) and the risk to be continuous there. The robust–empirical gap is then controlled by the variance expansion of Theorem 1. The concentration step needs a bounded-differences inequality for a supremum over an uncountable class, together with symmetrization; neither is in Mathlib in this form.

Formalization scope

Parameters live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), so norms, distances and projections are Euclidean. The sample is the coordinate process of the product measure P⊗nP^{\otimes n}P⊗n on Fin n → X, n≥1n\ge1n≥1, and probabilities are measures of sample sets (the outer measure for a set that is not measurable). The χ2\chi^2χ2 ball is the weight-vector form (8). The suboptimal sets are written without infima (R(θ)≤R(θ′)+ϵR(\theta)\le R(\theta')+\epsilonR(θ)≤R(θ′)+ϵ for all θ′∈Θ\theta'\in\Thetaθ′∈Θ). Each supremum "sup⁡≥c\sup\ge csup≥c" is written as "for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0 some θ\thetaθ reaches c−δc-\deltac−δ", so no statement relies on the default value of a real supremum. The Rademacher complexity is the published UnderstandingML.rademacher, and its expectation over the sample is assumed integrable, so that it is the true expectation and not the default value 000 of a Bochner integral. Lipschitz continuity is required on Θ\ThetaΘ, as printed.

Corrections and presuppositions:

  • ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0. The paper prints 0≤ϵ0\le\epsilon0≤ϵ. At ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0, ρ=0\rho=0ρ=0, both conditions of (27) hold, yet for ℓ(θ;x)=12(θ−x)2\ell(\theta;x)=\frac12(\theta-x)^2ℓ(θ;x)=21​(θ−x)2 on Θ=[−1,1]\Theta=[-1,1]Θ=[−1,1] with XXX uniform on [−12,12][-\frac12,\frac12][−21​,21​] the robust minimizer is the sample mean, which is almost surely not in S⋆={0}S_\star=\{0\}S⋆​={0}. The proof divides by ϵ\epsilonϵ (p. 45). The goal is stated for ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0.
  • S⋆S_\starS⋆​ nonempty and closed are assumed. The projection πS⋆\pi_{S_\star}πS⋆​​ presupposes them, and Appendix E calls S⋆S_\starS⋆​ closed.
  • Only the upper half of Theorem 1's (10) is stated; it needs no boundedness of the values.

The constant (2⋅8γLγ/λ)1/(γ−1)\big(2\cdot8^\gamma L^\gamma/\lambda\big)^{1/(\gamma-1)}(2⋅8γLγ/λ)1/(γ−1) is the printed one; the proof uses a smaller one, which the printed condition implies. The hypotheses ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0, γ>1\gamma>1γ>1 and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 make every power well defined. A formalization that assumed (26) vacuously, took ϵ=0\epsilon=0ϵ=0, or let the Rademacher term be a non-integrable Bochner integral would trivialize the goal; the statements rule these out.

Infrastructure: Euclidean projection onto closed convex sets and its normal-cone characterization (partly in Mathlib), convexity of integral functionals, McDiarmid's bounded-differences inequality, and symmetrization for suprema of empirical processes. The concentration tools and the localization lemma can be reused beyond this mission. Contributions toward McDiarmid's inequality and symmetrization are especially welcome.

Selected references

  • J. C. Duchi and H. Namkoong, Variance-based regularization with convex objectives, arXiv:1610.02581v3, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1610.02581
  • P. L. Bartlett, O. Bousquet and S. Mendelson, Local Rademacher complexities, Annals of Statistics 33(4), 2005. https://doi.org/10.1214/009053605000000282
  • S. Boucheron, G. Lugosi and P. Massart, Concentration Inequalities: A Nonasymptotic Theory of Independence, Oxford University Press, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199535255.001.0001
  • A. Shapiro, D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming: Modeling and Theory, SIAM, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751
  • A. Maurer and M. Pontil, Empirical Bernstein bounds and sample variance penalization, COLT, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0907.3740
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

A Tight Linear Time (1/2)-Approximation for Unconstrained Submodular Maximization 2: Randomized Double Greedy Achieves 1/2 of the Optimum in ExpectationResearch Paper

Motivation

Many selection problems assign a value to each subset of a finite collection: the coverage supplied by chosen facilities, the influence reached by chosen seeds, or the value of a coalition. A submodular set function has diminishing returns in the precise sense that the combined value of two sets, counting their overlap once, does not exceed the sum of their separate values. When the function is also monotone, taking more elements never hurts. The unconstrained problem studied here permits nonmonotone functions, so both accepting and rejecting an element can matter. The question is what a single pass through the elements can guarantee when the function is available through value queries. Buchbinder et al., FOCS 2012

The randomized algorithm in this mission attains an expected one-half approximation for every nonnegative submodular function. The paper presents this as tight in the value-oracle setting: it recalls the earlier result of Feige, Mirrokni and Vondrák that a fixed improvement beyond one-half requires exponentially many queries. The contribution here is therefore both the guarantee and a short adaptive rule that attains it in a linear number of iterations. The local proposal follows the FOCS 2012 version of the paper; its theorem numbering differs from the later SIAM Journal on Computing article. Buchbinder et al., §I.A and Theorem I.2

Setting

Let N\mathcal NN be a finite ground set, and let f:2N→R≥0f:2^{\mathcal N}\to\mathbb R_{\ge0}f:2N→R≥0​ assign a nonnegative real value to every subset. The unconstrained submodular maximization problem asks for the largest value f(S)f(S)f(S) among all S⊆NS\subseteq\mathcal NS⊆N. Write OPTOPTOPT for that value when no confusion arises, and OOO for a set attaining it. Submodularity means

f(A∪B)+f(A∩B)≤f(A)+f(B)(A,B⊆N).f(A\cup B)+f(A\cap B)\le f(A)+f(B)\qquad(A,B\subseteq\mathcal N).f(A∪B)+f(A∩B)≤f(A)+f(B)(A,B⊆N).

There is no monotonicity or normalization assumption: f(∅)f(\varnothing)f(∅) and f(N)f(\mathcal N)f(N) may both be positive. A value oracle returns f(S)f(S)f(S) for a requested subset SSS. The paper's complexity claim counts such queries, assuming a query takes constant time. Buchbinder et al., §I and footnotes 1–2

Algorithm 2 visits the elements once in an arbitrary order u1,…,unu_1,\ldots,u_nu1​,…,un​. It keeps two sets, starting at X0=∅X_0=\varnothingX0​=∅ and Y0=NY_0=\mathcal NY0​=N. At step iii, it measures the gain aia_iai​ from adding uiu_iui​ to Xi−1X_{i-1}Xi−1​ and the gain bib_ibi​ from removing uiu_iui​ from Yi−1Y_{i-1}Yi−1​. It clips each gain at zero, giving ai′=max⁡(ai,0)a'_i=\max(a_i,0)ai′​=max(ai​,0) and bi′=max⁡(bi,0)b'_i=\max(b_i,0)bi′​=max(bi​,0). It adds uiu_iui​ to XXX with probability ai′/(ai′+bi′)a'_i/(a'_i+b'_i)ai′​/(ai′​+bi′​) and otherwise removes it from YYY. When both clipped gains vanish, the paper defines the add probability as one. After all elements have been processed, the two sets coincide, and the algorithm returns their common value. The state law is adaptive: its probability at step iii depends on the actual pair of sets produced by earlier choices. Buchbinder et al., Algorithm 2

Formalization targets

The main target is Theorem I.2 for this exact algorithm and for every enumeration of the ground set:

max⁡S⊆Nf(S)≤2 E[f(Xn)].\max_{S\subseteq\mathcal N}f(S)\le 2\,\mathbb E[f(X_n)].S⊆Nmax​f(S)≤2E[f(Xn​)].

The milestone statements retain the paper's key local quantities. For a comparison optimum OOO, set OPTi=(O∪Xi)∩YiOPT_i=(O\cup X_i)\cap Y_iOPTi​=(O∪Xi​)∩Yi​. Lemma II.1 asserts ai+bi≥0a_i+b_i\ge0ai​+bi​≥0. The endpoint statement identifies OPT0=OOPT_0=OOPT0​=O and OPTn=Xn=YnOPT_n=X_n=Y_nOPTn​=Xn​=Yn​. Inequality (3) bounds the conditional loss in the positive-gain case; Lemma III.1 compares the expected change of OPTiOPT_iOPTi​ with the expected combined change of XiX_iXi​ and YiY_iYi​. The telescoped display keeps the initial endpoint values f(∅)f(\varnothing)f(∅) and f(N)f(\mathcal N)f(N) before using nonnegativity. Buchbinder et al., Lemmas II.1 and III.1, inequality (3), proof of Theorem I.2

A companion target is Theorem I.4 via its second proof. For two normalized monotone submodular utilities f1,f2f_1,f_2f1​,f2​, let g(S)=f1(S)+f2(N∖S)g(S)=f_1(S)+f_2(\mathcal N\setminus S)g(S)=f1​(S)+f2​(N∖S). The maximum of ggg is exactly the optimal welfare of a two-player partition. Algorithm 2 on ggg is asked to satisfy

3max⁡S⊆Ng(S)≤4 E[g(Xn)].3\max_{S\subseteq\mathcal N}g(S)\le4\,\mathbb E[g(X_n)].3S⊆Nmax​g(S)≤4E[g(Xn​)].

This is the paper's three-quarter guarantee in its welfare application. Buchbinder et al., Theorem I.4 and Proof (2)

Significance

The main theorem gives a specific randomized rule whose expected value is at least half the best subset value, even when accepting an element can lower the objective. It applies without restricting the cardinality or shape of the chosen subset. The welfare corollary shows that keeping the initial endpoint values in the analysis yields a stronger guarantee for the objective formed from two monotone players. Buchbinder et al., Theorems I.2 and I.4

This mission formalizes the statement of the algorithm, its intermediate state laws, its comparison set, and the paper's numbered proof targets. The algorithmic guarantee is proved in the source paper; the local Lean theorem files are open statements with sorry and do not yet give machine-checked proofs of these results. A completed development would supply a reusable formal model of an adaptive finite random process over pairs of subsets, as well as the specific submodular inequalities. The published Submodular and OPT definitions from the earlier Feige–Mirrokni–Vondrák formalization are reused here.

Difficulty

The two possible updates cannot be assessed independently. The probability of each choice depends on the current state, and the comparison set OPTiOPT_iOPTi​ can gain or lose the processed element in a way that differs from the two algorithm sets. A bound on the expected value of XiX_iXi​ alone does not control the movement of OPTiOPT_iOPTi​. The proof must handle the clipped gains, including the case when both are zero, while preserving the exact joint law of (Xi,Yi)(X_i,Y_i)(Xi​,Yi​). Buchbinder et al., proof of Lemma III.1

Formalization scope

The ground set is a finite Lean type; subsets are Finset X, and values are real numbers. An order is a list with no repeated elements that covers the type, including the empty type. The run is an explicit finite mass function on pairs of subsets after every prefix of the list. Expectation is a finite weighted sum, so it has no integrability exception. The transition clips the two real marginal gains and handles 0/00/00/0 by assigning probability one to the add branch, exactly as Algorithm 2 specifies. The optimum is the published maximum over all subsets. No ratio divides by a possibly zero optimum.

The theorem fixes Algorithm 2 itself; an arbitrary process with nested sets or a process defined by its desired approximation property does not satisfy this scope. The Lean goal states the value bound and leaves the paper's linear-time claim outside the formal theorem. The algorithm uses four value evaluations per processed element in its printed rule; the Lean development represents those evaluations, not an implementation cost model. The statement that its two final sets coincide is a separate milestone.

The source's main-text decreasing-returns definition has an overbroad quantifier on the added element. This development uses the equivalent lattice inequality given in the paper's footnote, which permits nonmonotone functions. The proof of Lemma II.1 also has a set-index slip, and the proof of Theorem I.2 prints FFF for fff in one display; neither slip is copied into a formal statement. The one-step inequality (3) is stated for any nested pair with the processed element in Y∖XY\setminus XY∖X, a generalization of the conditioned reachable states in the paper. Contributions proving the endpoint invariant, conditional inequality, one-step expected estimate, and final bound are all within scope.

Selected references

  • Niv Buchbinder, Moran Feldman, Joseph Naor and Roy Schwartz, A Tight Linear Time (1/2)-Approximation for Unconstrained Submodular Maximization, Proceedings of the 53rd IEEE Symposium on Foundations of Computer Science, 2012. FOCS version used here.
  • Niv Buchbinder, Moran Feldman, Joseph Naor and Roy Schwartz, A Tight Linear Time (1/2)-Approximation for Unconstrained Submodular Maximization, SIAM Journal on Computing 44(5), 2015. DOI: 10.1137/130929205. The cited statement indices above refer to the FOCS version.
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamical SystemsOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 4: Subgaussian Martingale Noise with Σ exp(−c/γ_n) < ∞ for Every c > 0 Satisfies Assumption A1 Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion

xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​)

in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, where FFF is a vector field, γn\gamma_nγn​ are small step sizes and Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is noise. Such recursions go back to Robbins and Monro's root-finding scheme (Robbins–Monro 1951) and underlie stochastic gradient descent, temporal-difference learning, adaptive control and learning in games. The ODE method studies them by comparing the iterates with the trajectories of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x).

Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) organize the ODE method in two steps. A deterministic step, Proposition 4.1, shows that whenever the noise satisfies a condition called A1 (together with a boundedness condition on the iterates), the interpolated process is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF. A probabilistic step then verifies A1 for concrete noise models. Proposition 4.2 does this for martingale difference noise with bounded qqq-th moments, at the price of step sizes with ∑nγn1+q/2<∞\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑n​γn1+q/2​<∞. This mission formalizes the second verification, Proposition 4.4: when the noise is subgaussian, A1 holds almost surely under the much weaker requirement that ∑ne−c/γn<∞\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑n​e−c/γn​<∞ for every c>0c>0c>0, which allows step sizes decaying only slightly faster than 1/log⁡n1/\log n1/logn. The notes attribute the result to Duflo (1997), see also Kushner and Yin (1997) and Benaïm and Hirsch (1996).

Setting

Let {γn}n≥1\{\gamma_n\}_{n\ge1}{γn​}n≥1​ be a deterministic sequence with γn≥0\gamma_n\ge0γn​≥0, ∑nγn=∞\sum_n\gamma_n=\infty∑n​γn​=∞ and γn→0\gamma_n\to0γn​→0 (a step sequence). Put τ0=0\tau_0=0τ0​=0, τn=∑i=1nγi\tau_n=\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_iτn​=∑i=1n​γi​, and let

m(t)=sup⁡{k≥0: t≥τk}m(t)=\sup\{k\ge0:\ t\ge\tau_k\}m(t)=sup{k≥0: t≥τk​}

be the index of the step that contains time t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For a sequence {Un}n≥1\{U_n\}_{n\ge1}{Un​}n≥1​ define the piecewise constant processes Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1\bar U(t)=U_{m(t)+1}Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1​ and γˉ(t)=γm(t)+1\bar\gamma(t)=\gamma_{m(t)+1}γˉ​(t)=γm(t)+1​, so that step n+1n+1n+1 occupies the time interval [τn,τn+1)[\tau_n,\tau_{n+1})[τn​,τn+1​) of length γn+1\gamma_{n+1}γn+1​.

Assumption A1 asks that for every T>0T>0T>0

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡{∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥: k=n+1,…,m(τn+T)}=0,\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup\Big\{\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|:\ k=n+1,\dots,m(\tau_n+T)\Big\}=0,n→∞lim​sup{​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​: k=n+1,…,m(τn​+T)}=0,

or, in the form the notes call equivalent, lim⁡t→∞Δ(t,T)=0\lim_{t\to\infty}\Delta(t,T)=0limt→∞​Δ(t,T)=0 for every T>0T>0T>0, where

Δ(t,T)=sup⁡0≤h≤T∥∫tt+hUˉ(s) ds∥.\Delta(t,T)=\sup_{0\le h\le T}\Big\|\int_t^{t+h}\bar U(s)\,ds\Big\|.Δ(t,T)=0≤h≤Tsup​​∫tt+h​Uˉ(s)ds​.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a nondecreasing sequence {Fn}\{\mathcal F_n\}{Fn​} of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras, and F:Rd→RdF:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^dF:Rd→Rd continuous. A sequence {xn}\{x_n\}{xn​} given by the recursion above is a Robbins–Monro algorithm if γ\gammaγ is deterministic, UnU_nUn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0. The noise is subgaussian if there is a number Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0 such that for all nnn and all θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd

E(exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩ ∣ Fn)≤exp⁡(Γ2∥θ∥2).E\big(\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangle\,\big|\,\mathcal F_n\big)\le\exp\Big(\frac\Gamma2\|\theta\|^2\Big).E(exp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩​Fn​)≤exp(2Γ​∥θ∥2).

Bounded noise, ∥Un∥≤Γ\|U_n\|\le\sqrt\Gamma∥Un​∥≤Γ​, is an example.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.4

For a Robbins–Monro algorithm with subgaussian noise and a deterministic step sequence such that

∑ne−c/γn<∞for each c>0,\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty\qquad\text{for each }c>0,n∑​e−c/γn​<∞for each c>0,

with probability one the realised noise sequence satisfies A1, in both of its forms, simultaneously for all T>0T>0T>0.

Milestones

  1. The exponential supermartingale. For every θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd,
Zn(θ)=exp⁡[∑i=1n⟨θ,γiUi⟩−Γ2∑i=1nγi2∥θ∥2]Z_n(\theta)=\exp\Big[\sum_{i=1}^n\langle\theta,\gamma_iU_i\rangle-\frac\Gamma2\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_i^2\|\theta\|^2\Big]Zn​(θ)=exp[i=1∑n​⟨θ,γi​Ui​⟩−2Γ​i=1∑n​γi2​∥θ∥2]

is a supermartingale. 2. Directional maximal tail bound. For every unit vector eee, α>0\alpha>0α>0, nnn and T>0T>0T>0,

P(sup⁡n<k≤m(τn+T)⟨e,∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1⟩≥α)≤exp⁡(−α22Γ∑i=nm(τn+T)−1γi+12).P\Big(\sup_{n<k\le m(\tau_n+T)}\Big\langle e,\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\rangle\ge\alpha\Big)\le\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{2\Gamma\sum_{i=n}^{m(\tau_n+T)-1}\gamma_{i+1}^2}\Big).P(n<k≤m(τn​+T)sup​⟨e,i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​⟩≥α)≤exp(2Γ∑i=nm(τn​+T)−1​γi+12​−α2​).
  1. Eq. (18). There are C,C′>0C,C'>0C,C′>0 depending only on ddd and Γ\GammaΓ with
P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp⁡(−α2C′∫tt+Tγˉ(s) ds)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).P(\Delta(t,T)\ge\alpha)\le C\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{C'\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma(s)\,ds}\Big)\qquad(t\ge0,\ T>0,\ \alpha>0).P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp(C′∫tt+T​γˉ​(s)ds−α2​)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).
  1. Block comparison. Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T)\Delta(t,T)\le2\Delta(kT,T)+\Delta((k+1)T,T)Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T) for kT≤t<(k+1)TkT\le t<(k+1)TkT≤t<(k+1)T.

Significance

Proposition 4.4 is the sufficient condition for the ODE method when the noise has Gaussian-type tails. Its step-size condition holds whenever γnlog⁡n→0\gamma_n\log n\to0γn​logn→0, so it admits steps that decrease far more slowly than the ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞ of the classical L2L^2L2 theory; slowly decreasing steps are what practitioners use to keep algorithms responsive. Combined with Proposition 4.1 it shows that the interpolated process of such an algorithm, with bounded iterates, is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF, and the limit set theorems of the notes then locate the limit points of the algorithm.

The result is proved in the notes and in the cited literature; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A formal proof would add reusable pieces: an exponential supermartingale and maximal inequality for vector-valued martingale differences with a conditional subgaussian bound (Mathlib's conditional subgaussian notion is scalar), a Borel–Cantelli argument along the grid kTkTkT, and the continuous-time bookkeeping of Uˉ\bar UUˉ, γˉ\bar\gammaγˉ​ and Δ\DeltaΔ shared with the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The moment method of Proposition 4.2 does not reach this regime: any fixed polynomial moment of the window sums decays only polynomially in the window's step sizes, and under ∑e−c/γn<∞\sum e^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑e−c/γn​<∞ alone polynomial bounds are not summable over windows. Exponential tail bounds are needed, and they must be maximal (uniform over the window) and must hold for the norm of a vector, not only for a scalar. The continuous-time deviation Δ(t,T)\Delta(t,T)Δ(t,T) involves partial steps at both ends of [t,t+h][t,t+h][t,t+h], so the bound must be stated in terms of ∫tt+Tγˉ\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma∫tt+T​γˉ​ rather than a sum over whole steps, with constants that do not depend on ttt, TTT or α\alphaα. Finally, A1 quantifies over all T>0T>0T>0: the almost-sure statement must hold on a single event of full probability for every TTT.

Formalization scope

The space is Rd\mathbb R^dRd as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) (the paper writes Rm\mathbb R^mRm); time is real. The sequences γ\gammaγ and UUU are indexed by N\mathbb NN, and their values at 000 are unused, as the paper indexes them from 111. The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ; Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-strongly measurable and integrable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0 almost surely. The subgaussian condition requires exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangleexp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩ to be integrable for every θ\thetaθ and nnn. The summand e−c/γne^{-c/\gamma_n}e−c/γn​ is taken to be 000 when γn=0\gamma_n=0γn​=0, its limiting value. The suprema in A1 and Δ\DeltaΔ are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; the supremum over an empty range of kkk is 000. In Eq. (18) the constants are chosen before the probability space, the algorithm and t,T,αt,T,\alphat,T,α.

The following readings are excluded and are not acceptable formalizations: a subgaussian condition that holds vacuously because the exponential is not integrable (Lean's conditional expectation of a non-integrable function is 000); a summability condition made trivial or false by the convention c/0=0c/0=0c/0=0; and the conclusion "for each TTT, A1 holds almost surely" in place of "almost surely, A1 holds for all TTT". The second sentence of Proposition 4.4 (the asymptotic pseudotrajectory conclusion) is outside this mission.

All hypotheses are satisfiable: U=0U=0U=0, x=0x=0x=0, F=0F=0F=0, Γ=1\Gamma=1Γ=1 and γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n satisfy every one of them.

Contributions welcome: a maximal inequality for nonnegative supermartingales in the form needed here, vector subgaussian tail bounds for martingale transforms with deterministic weights (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas on the step processes and Δ\DeltaΔ (measurability, local integrability, additivity), and the proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Duflo, Random Iterative Models, Applications of Mathematics 34, Springer, 1997.
  • H. J. Kushner and G. G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 1997.
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic SystemsTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Algorithms for Stochastic Inventory Control Models 2: The Triple-Balancing Policy Costs at Most Three Times the Optimum for Stochastic Lot-SizingResearch Paper

Motivation

Periodic-review inventory control with a fixed ordering cost is one of the oldest problems in operations research. A firm reviews its stock at the beginning of each of TTT periods, decides whether to place an order, pays a fixed cost KKK for every order it places, and pays holding costs on leftover stock and penalties on unmet (backlogged) demand. When demand is random and correlated across periods, and the firm's forecast evolves as information arrives, the optimal policy solves a dynamic program over the whole information state. That program is intractable in general, and in practice firms use heuristics with no performance guarantee.

Levi, Pál, Roundy and Shmoys (Math. Oper. Res. 32(2), 2007) gave policies with worst-case guarantees for these models, using a "marginal cost accounting" scheme that charges each unit's holding cost to the period in which it was ordered. For the model with fixed ordering costs, the stochastic lot-sizing problem, they assume that the demand of each period is known at the beginning of that period (make-to-order systems, or settings where the short-term forecast is accurate), while demand further ahead stays random and arbitrarily correlated. Under this assumption they define the triple-balancing policy and prove it costs at most three times the optimum in expectation.

Timeline:

  • Scarf (1960) proved that (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) policies are optimal for independent demands with fixed costs; with correlated demand the optimal policy is a state-dependent (st(ft),St(ft))(s_t(f_t), S_t(f_t))(st​(ft​),St​(ft​)) rule that is hard to compute.
  • Levi, Pál, Roundy and Shmoys (2007) gave the dual-balancing 2-approximation for the model without fixed costs (§4) and the triple-balancing 3-approximation for the stochastic lot-sizing problem (§6, Theorem 6.1), both for arbitrarily correlated demand.

Setting

There are periods t=1,…,Tt=1,\dots,Tt=1,…,T on a probability space (Ω,F,μ)(\Omega,\mathcal F,\mu)(Ω,F,μ) with a filtration (Ft)(\mathcal F_t)(Ft​): Ft\mathcal F_tFt​ is the information available at the beginning of period ttt. The data are a fixed ordering cost K≥0K\ge0K≥0, per-unit holding costs ht≥0h_t\ge0ht​≥0, per-unit backlogging penalties pt≥0p_t\ge0pt​≥0, an initial inventory level x1∈Rx_1\in\mathbb Rx1​∈R, and nonnegative demands DtD_tDt​. The per-unit ordering cost is zero, the lead time is zero and there is no discounting. The defining assumption is that DtD_tDt​ is Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-measurable: the demand of a period is known when the period begins. For every period sss there is a conditional joint distribution IsI_sIs​ of the demands given Fs\mathcal F_sFs​, under which every conditional mean E[Dt∣fs]E[D_t\mid f_s]E[Dt​∣fs​] is finite.

A feasible policy is an order process Q=(Qt)Q=(Q_t)Q=(Qt​) with Qt≥0Q_t\ge0Qt​≥0 and QtQ_tQt​ determined by Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. Its inventory levels are xt=x1+∑j<t(Qj−Dj)x_t=x_1+\sum_{j<t}(Q_j-D_j)xt​=x1​+∑j<t​(Qj​−Dj​) before ordering and yt=xt+Qty_t=x_t+Q_tyt​=xt​+Qt​ after ordering, and its cost is

C(Q)=∑t=1T(K 1(Qt>0)+ht(yt−Dt)++pt(Dt−yt)+).\mathcal C(Q)=\sum_{t=1}^T\Bigl(K\,\mathbb 1(Q_t>0)+h_t(y_t-D_t)^++p_t(D_t-y_t)^+\Bigr).C(Q)=t=1∑T​(K1(Qt​>0)+ht​(yt​−Dt​)++pt​(Dt​−yt​)+).

The triple-balancing policy TB uses two rules. Let s∗s^*s∗ be the last period before sss in which TB ordered (s∗=0s^*=0s∗=0 if none). Rule 1: TB orders in period sss if and only if, without an order in sss, the accumulated backlogging cost over (s∗,s](s^*,s](s∗,s] would exceed KKK. Rule 2: when it orders in s<Ts<Ts<T, it orders

qsB=max⁡{q≥0: E[HsB(q)∣fs]≤K},HsB(q)=∑j=sThj(q−(D[s,j]−xs)+)+,q_s^B=\max\{q\ge0:\ E[H_s^B(q)\mid f_s]\le K\},\qquad H_s^B(q)=\sum_{j=s}^T h_j\bigl(q-(D_{[s,j]}-x_s)^+\bigr)^+,qsB​=max{q≥0: E[HsB​(q)∣fs​]≤K},HsB​(q)=j=s∑T​hj​(q−(D[s,j]​−xs​)+)+,

the largest quantity whose expected marginal holding cost over [s,T][s,T][s,T] is at most KKK. When it orders in period TTT, it orders exactly enough to clear the backorders and meet DTD_TDT​. Let NNN be the number of orders TB places.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

For every instance, the triple-balancing policy TB and every feasible policy PPP satisfy

E[C(TB)]≤3 E[C(P)].E[\mathcal C(TB)]\le 3\,E[\mathcal C(P)].E[C(TB)]≤3E[C(P)].

The constant 3 is the paper's. The statement leaves the demand law, the information structure and the cost data unrestricted beyond the standing assumptions above.

Milestones

  1. §6.1, Rule 2 observation. In a period where TB orders, Ds≤ysTBD_s\le y_s^{TB}Ds​≤ysTB​: no backorders remain at the end of the period.
  2. Lemma 6.1. K⋅E[N]≤E[C(P)]K\cdot E[N]\le E[\mathcal C(P)]K⋅E[N]≤E[C(P)] for every feasible PPP.
  3. Lemma 6.2. E[C(TB)]≤E[C(P)]+2K⋅E[N]E[\mathcal C(TB)]\le E[\mathcal C(P)]+2K\cdot E[N]E[C(TB)]≤E[C(P)]+2K⋅E[N] for every feasible PPP.

Two non-milestone theorems show that the setting is not empty. A conditional demand law exists whenever demands are integrable, and a triple-balancing policy exists when hT>0h_T>0hT​>0.

Significance

The theorem gives a policy that can be computed online and comes with a worst-case expected-cost guarantee that does not depend on the demand distribution, the horizon or the cost data. In this setting the optimal policy is not computable in general, and the previously used heuristics have no such bound. The two lemmas separate a lower bound on every policy, in terms of TB's own number of orders, from an upper bound on TB's cost. The authors' subsequent work extends the balancing template to capacitated and multi-echelon models (§7 of the paper).

The result is proved in the paper. As far as we know, no machine-checked version exists of this theorem, of the balancing argument, or of a stochastic inventory model with correlated demand and evolving information. A formalization would check the argument, which is terse in places: the printed proof of Lemma 6.2 indexes its final sum loosely and must handle the event N=0N=0N=0. It would also produce reusable infrastructure for policies adapted to a filtration, for regular conditional distributions of future demand, and for cost accounting over random intervals between orders.

Difficulty

The costs of TB and of an arbitrary policy cannot be compared period by period, because the two policies order at different, random times that depend on the evolving information. Any comparison has to be made over intervals whose endpoints are stopping times determined by TB, conditioned on the information at their start. At such a time the other policy may hold more or less stock than TB, and the bound must hold in both cases. Bounding each policy's cost on its own does not work: the guarantee rests on a coupling between when TB orders and what every other policy must pay over the same random stretch of time. The formal side adds a second difficulty. Rule 2 is defined through a conditional expectation viewed as a function of the order quantity, so it needs a regular conditional distribution and a measurable selection of the maximizer.

Formalization scope

  • Periods are natural numbers 1,…,T1,\dots,T1,…,T, demands and orders are real-valued, and data at indices outside 1,…,T1,\dots,T1,…,T are unused.
  • Information is a MeasureTheory.Filtration ℕ. A policy is feasible when it is nonnegative and adapted, and "DtD_tDt​ known at the start of period ttt" means DtD_tDt​ is Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-measurable.
  • The conditional distributions IsI_sIs​ are model data: Markov kernels to demand paths that are Fs\mathcal F_sFs​-measurable regular conditional distributions of the demand path. At every outcome they make DsD_sDs​ deterministic, demands nonnegative and the conditional means E[Dt∣fs]E[D_t\mid f_s]E[Dt​∣fs​] finite.
  • Expected costs, E[N]E[N]E[N] and the conditional expectation in Rule 2 are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Lemma 6.2 is stated additively, E[C(TB)]≤E[C(P)]+2K E[N]E[\mathcal C(TB)]\le E[\mathcal C(P)]+2K\,E[N]E[C(TB)]≤E[C(P)]+2KE[N], which is the paper's inequality whenever the expectations are finite.
  • The comparison policy is an arbitrary feasible policy, not an optimal one. The paper's proofs use only feasibility, and this form implies the paper's whenever an optimum exists, without any existence hypothesis.
  • TB is the predicate "feasible and satisfies Rules 1 and 2 at every period and outcome". The rules determine the policy uniquely. Rule 1 uses a strict "exceeds KKK", and the period-TTT order is DT−xTD_T-x_TDT​−xT​.

Several trivializing formalizations are ruled out. Junk conditional expectations cannot make Rule 2 hold for every qqq, because it uses kernel integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Infinite expected costs cannot be read as 000. The policy class is not empty, because a separate theorem gives existence under hT>0h_T>0hT​>0 (without some positive holding cost on [s,T][s,T][s,T] the maximum in Rule 2 does not exist).

Contributions welcome: proofs of the existence theorems (measurable selection of qsBq_s^BqsB​, versions of regular conditional distributions), the stopping-time decomposition of the cost over TB's order intervals, and Lemmas 6.1 and 6.2.

Selected references

  • R. Levi, M. Pál, R. O. Roundy, D. B. Shmoys, Approximation Algorithms for Stochastic Inventory Control Models, Mathematics of Operations Research 32(2):284–302, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1060.0205
  • H. Scarf, The Optimality of (S, s) Policies in the Dynamic Inventory Problem, in Mathematical Methods in the Social Sciences, Stanford University Press, 1960.
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior 5: The Maximum Likelihood Estimator Exists with Probability Tending to One and Is Consistent and Asymptotically NormalResearch Paper

Motivation

The conditional logit model is the workhorse of discrete choice analysis in econometrics, transportation planning, marketing and revenue management. An individual facing a finite set of alternatives picks alternative iii with probability proportional to eziθe^{z_i\theta}ezi​θ, where ziz_izi​ is a vector of observed attributes and θ\thetaθ an unknown parameter vector. Daniel McFadden's 1974 chapter, Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior, derived this model from a theory of random utility maximization and set out how to estimate θ\thetaθ by maximum likelihood. McFadden received the 2000 Nobel Memorial Prize in Economic Sciences for his development of theory and methods for analyzing discrete choice.

Every confidence interval and hypothesis test computed from a fitted logit model rests on the large-sample theory in §III of that chapter: the maximum likelihood estimator exists with probability tending to one, converges to the true parameter, and is approximately normal with covariance given by the inverse information matrix. This mission formalizes that theory, Lemmas 5 and 6 of the paper, as proved in its Appendix.

Setting

Observations are indexed serially, m=0,1,2,…m = 0, 1, 2, \dotsm=0,1,2,…, as in the paper's Appendix ("Let m be a serial index of trials and repetitions"). Observation mmm offers Jm≥1J_m \ge 1Jm​≥1 alternatives, and alternative iii carries a vector zim∈RKz_{im} \in \mathbb R^Kzim​∈RK of independent variables. For a parameter θ∈RK\theta \in \mathbb R^Kθ∈RK the selection probabilities are

Pim(θ)=ezimθ∑j=1Jmezjmθ,zˉm(θ)=∑iPim(θ) zim.P_{im}(\theta) = \frac{e^{z_{im}\theta}}{\sum_{j=1}^{J_m} e^{z_{jm}\theta}}, \qquad \bar z_m(\theta) = \sum_{i} P_{im}(\theta)\, z_{im}.Pim​(θ)=∑j=1Jm​​ezjm​θezim​θ​,zˉm​(θ)=i∑​Pim​(θ)zim​.

The data are generated at a true parameter θ0\theta^0θ0: the chosen alternatives Y0,Y1,…Y_0, Y_1, \dotsY0​,Y1​,… are independent random variables with Pr⁡(Ym=i)=Pim(θ0)\Pr(Y_m = i) = P_{im}(\theta^0)Pr(Ym​=i)=Pim​(θ0). The log-likelihood of the first qqq observations is Lq(θ)=∑m<qlog⁡PYmm(θ)L^q(\theta) = \sum_{m<q}\log P_{Y_m m}(\theta)Lq(θ)=∑m<q​logPYm​m​(θ). The moment matrix of observation mmm is

Ωm=∑iPim(θ0) (zim−zˉm)(zim−zˉm)′,zˉm=zˉm(θ0).\Omega_m = \sum_{i} P_{im}(\theta^0)\,(z_{im}-\bar z_m)(z_{im}-\bar z_m)', \qquad \bar z_m = \bar z_m(\theta^0).Ωm​=i∑​Pim​(θ0)(zim​−zˉm​)(zim​−zˉm​)′,zˉm​=zˉm​(θ0).

Axiom 7 asks that Jm≤J∗J_m \le J_*Jm​≤J∗​ and ∣zim∣≤M|z_{im}| \le M∣zim​∣≤M uniformly, and that 1q∑m<qΩm\frac1q\sum_{m<q}\Omega_mq1​∑m<q​Ωm​ converge to a positive definite matrix Ω\OmegaΩ. Axiom 6, for a given sample, asks that no nonzero γ\gammaγ satisfy (zjm−zYmm)γ≤0(z_{jm} - z_{Y_m m})\gamma \le 0(zjm​−zYm​m​)γ≤0 for all observed mmm and all jjj. A maximum likelihood estimator θ^q\hat\theta^qθ^q is a measurable choice of a maximizer of LqL^qLq, wherever one exists.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 6

θ^q→Pr⁡θ0andq Ω1/2(θ^q−θ0)→dN(0,IK)(q→∞).\hat\theta^q \xrightarrow{\Pr} \theta^0 \quad\text{and}\quad \sqrt q\,\Omega^{1/2}(\hat\theta^q - \theta^0) \xrightarrow{d} N(0, I_K) \qquad (q \to \infty).θ^qPr​θ0andq​Ω1/2(θ^q−θ0)d​N(0,IK​)(q→∞).

Milestones

  1. Axiom 7 implies Axiom 5 (the full-rank condition) in all sufficiently large samples.
  2. Equation (42): Pim(θ)≥1/(J∗e2M∣θ∣)P_{im}(\theta) \ge 1/(J_* e^{2M|\theta|})Pim​(θ)≥1/(J∗​e2M∣θ∣).
  3. Lemma 5: Pr⁡(Axiom 6 holds and Lq attains its maximum)→1\Pr(\text{Axiom 6 holds and } L^q \text{ attains its maximum}) \to 1Pr(Axiom 6 holds and Lq attains its maximum)→1.
  4. Equation (43): the first three derivatives of log⁡Pim\log P_{im}logPim​ are bounded by 2M2M2M, 4M24M^24M2, 8M38M^38M3.
  5. Equation (46): each score ∇log⁡PYmm(θ0)\nabla\log P_{Y_m m}(\theta^0)∇logPYm​m​(θ0) has mean zero.
  6. Equation (47): each expected Hessian equals −Ωm-\Omega_m−Ωm​.
  7. Consistency of θ^q\hat\theta^qθ^q.
  8. Equation (58): q−1/2 Ω−1/2∑m<q∇log⁡PYmm(θ0)→dN(0,IK)q^{-1/2}\,\Omega^{-1/2}\sum_{m<q}\nabla\log P_{Y_m m}(\theta^0) \xrightarrow{d} N(0, I_K)q−1/2Ω−1/2∑m<q​∇logPYm​m​(θ0)d​N(0,IK​).

Significance

The result. Lemma 6 is what licenses reading θ^q\hat\theta^qθ^q as approximately N(θ0,q−1Ω−1)N(\theta^0, q^{-1}\Omega^{-1})N(θ0,q−1Ω−1), so that the diagonal of the inverse information matrix estimates the sampling variances and q(θ^q−θ0)′Ω(θ^q−θ0)q(\hat\theta^q-\theta^0)'\Omega(\hat\theta^q-\theta^0)q(θ^q−θ0)′Ω(θ^q−θ0) is asymptotically χK2\chi^2_KχK2​. Lemma 5 complements it: in finite samples the likelihood can fail to have a maximum (the observations are then "explained" by a direction γ\gammaγ of Axiom 6), and the lemma shows this failure is asymptotically negligible. The data are not identically distributed (each observation has its own alternatives), so the result is not an instance of the textbook i.i.d. maximum likelihood theorem.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper, in outline. A machine-checked version adds: a complete proof of the existence part (Lemma 5), whose published argument is a sketch by induction over an infinite index set; a precise treatment of the estimator where no maximizer exists; the correction of two misprints in the published proof (the normalization 1/q1/q1/q in (58), which must be 1/q1/\sqrt q1/q​, and a constant in (51)); and a multivariate Lindeberg–Feller central limit theorem for bounded, independent, non-identically distributed vectors, which the proof invokes and which is reusable well beyond this paper. No machine-checked proof of these results is known.

Difficulty

The obvious route, "the log-likelihood is concave, so its maximizer converges", needs a maximizer to exist, and in a finite sample it may not; the estimator is defined only on an event whose probability must first be shown to tend to one. Consistency then needs a uniform law of large numbers for the gradient on a sphere around θ0\theta^0θ0, controlled by the third-derivative bound (43). Asymptotic normality needs a central limit theorem for independent but not identically distributed score vectors, with covariances Ωm\Omega_mΩm​ that converge only on average; the i.i.d. central limit theorem does not apply. Finally the random Hessian at an intermediate point must be shown to converge in probability, which ties the consistency result into the normality argument.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin K); zθz\thetazθ is the inner product, and all norms are Euclidean (footnote 11's sum-of-absolute-values norm is equivalent and gives the same qualitative axiom); derivative bounds use operator norms.
  • The paper's NNN trials with RnR_nRn​ repetitions are the special case of the serial indexing in which consecutive observations repeat their data; the sample size ∑nRn\sum_n R_n∑n​Rn​ is qqq.
  • Axiom 7's limit (27) is taken in its serial form (48), with PPP evaluated at θ0\theta^0θ0.
  • The estimator is any measurable selection that maximizes LqL^qLq whenever LqL^qLq has a maximum, and is unconstrained otherwise. Requiring a maximizer for every sample would be unsatisfiable, since Axiom 6 fails with positive probability, and would make the goal vacuous; this convention rules that out.
  • Consistency is TendstoInMeasure. Asymptotic normality is TendstoInDistribution to a random vector whose law is stdGaussian. Ω1/2\Omega^{1/2}Ω1/2 is the positive semidefinite square root CFC.sqrt.
  • Needed infrastructure: derivatives of log-sum-exp, a law of large numbers for bounded independent vectors, and a multivariate Lindeberg–Feller theorem. Mathlib provides the one-dimensional i.i.d. central limit theorem only. Contributions of these general results as separate theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. McFadden, Conditional logit analysis of qualitative choice behavior, in P. Zarembka (ed.), Frontiers in Econometrics, Academic Press, New York, 1974, pp. 105–142.
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. II, Wiley, 1966 (Lindeberg–Feller theorem, pp. 256–258).
  • C. R. Rao, Linear Statistical Inference and Its Applications, Wiley (cited by McFadden as Rao (1968), pp. 347–351, for the asymptotic χ2\chi^2χ2 test).
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Certified Adversarial Robustness via Randomized Smoothing 2: The Certified ℓ2 Radius Cannot Be EnlargedResearch Paper

Motivation

Neural-network classifiers can be made to change their output by perturbations of the input that are imperceptible to a person. A certified defense is a classifier together with a proof that its prediction at a point xxx does not change for any perturbation δ\deltaδ in a stated set, typically an ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ ball ∥δ∥2<R\|\delta\|_2<R∥δ∥2​<R. Randomized smoothing turns an arbitrary base classifier into one with such a certificate by classifying Gaussian-noised copies of the input and returning the most likely class. Cohen, Rosenfeld and Kolter (arXiv:1902.02918v2, ICML 2019) gave the certified radius R=σ2(Φ−1(pA‾)−Φ−1(pB‾))R=\frac{\sigma}{2}\big(\Phi^{-1}(\underline{p_A})-\Phi^{-1}(\overline{p_B})\big)R=2σ​(Φ−1(pA​​)−Φ−1(pB​​)) (their Theorem 1) and showed, in their Theorem 2, that this radius cannot be enlarged when only the two class-probability bounds are known about the base classifier. This mission formalizes Theorem 2. Theorem 1 is the subject of the companion mission of this series.

Earlier certificates for the same smoothed classifier, by Lecuyer et al. (2019) via differential privacy and Li et al. (2018) via Rényi divergence, gave smaller radii. Theorem 2 shows that no further analysis that uses only the class-probability bounds can improve on Theorem 1.

Setting

Inputs live in Rd\mathbb R^dRd with the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​; classes form a set Y\mathcal YY. A base classifier is a map f:Rd→Yf:\mathbb R^d\to\mathcal Yf:Rd→Y with Borel decision regions. For a noise level σ>0\sigma>0σ>0, write N(x,σ2I)\mathcal N(x,\sigma^2I)N(x,σ2I) for the isotropic Gaussian law of x+εx+\varepsilonx+ε with ε∼N(0,σ2I)\varepsilon\sim\mathcal N(0,\sigma^2I)ε∼N(0,σ2I). The class probability of ccc at xxx is P(f(x+ε)=c)\mathbb P(f(x+\varepsilon)=c)P(f(x+ε)=c), and the smoothed classifier is

g(x)=arg⁡max⁡c∈Y P(f(x+ε)=c).g(x)=\arg\max_{c\in\mathcal Y}\ \mathbb P(f(x+\varepsilon)=c).g(x)=argc∈Ymax​ P(f(x+ε)=c).

Let Φ\PhiΦ be the standard Gaussian CDF and Φ−1\Phi^{-1}Φ−1 its inverse on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). A classifier fff is consistent with the observed class probabilities (6) for a top class cAc_AcA​ and numbers pA‾≥pB‾\underline{p_A}\ge\overline{p_B}pA​​≥pB​​ if

P(f(x+ε)=cA) ≥ pA‾ ≥ pB‾ ≥ max⁡c≠cAP(f(x+ε)=c).\mathbb P(f(x+\varepsilon)=c_A)\ \ge\ \underline{p_A}\ \ge\ \overline{p_B}\ \ge\ \max_{c\ne c_A}\mathbb P(f(x+\varepsilon)=c).P(f(x+ε)=cA​) ≥ pA​​ ≥ pB​​ ≥ c=cA​max​P(f(x+ε)=c).

The certified radius is R=σ2(Φ−1(pA‾)−Φ−1(pB‾))R=\frac{\sigma}{2}\big(\Phi^{-1}(\underline{p_A})-\Phi^{-1}(\overline{p_B})\big)R=2σ​(Φ−1(pA​​)−Φ−1(pB​​)). In Lean these are gaussNoise x σ, classProb f σ x c, IsConsistent f σ x cA pA pB and radius σ pA pB in the namespace Cohen2019.Tight, with Phi and PhiInvReal from the series' shared module Cohen2019.Robust; the half-spaces A={z:δT(z−x)≤σ∥δ∥Φ−1(pA‾)}A=\{z:\delta^T(z-x)\le\sigma\|\delta\|\Phi^{-1}(\underline{p_A})\}A={z:δT(z−x)≤σ∥δ∥Φ−1(pA​​)} and B={z:δT(z−x)≥σ∥δ∥Φ−1(1−pB‾)}B=\{z:\delta^T(z-x)\ge\sigma\|\delta\|\Phi^{-1}(1-\overline{p_B})\}B={z:δT(z−x)≥σ∥δ∥Φ−1(1−pB​​)} of the paper's Appendix A are setA and setB.

Quotations write the paper's underlined lower bound as p̲A and its overlined upper bound as p̄B. The PDF has no printed page numbers; every page cited is the PDF page of arXiv:1902.02918v2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (corrected)

Assume 0<pB‾≤pA‾<10<\overline{p_B}\le\underline{p_A}<10<pB​​≤pA​​<1, pA‾+pB‾≤1\underline{p_A}+\overline{p_B}\le1pA​​+pB​​≤1, and that some finite set sss of classes other than cAc_AcA​ satisfies 1≤pA‾+∣s∣ pB‾1\le\underline{p_A}+|s|\,\overline{p_B}1≤pA​​+∣s∣pB​​. Then for every δ\deltaδ with ∥δ∥2>R\|\delta\|_2>R∥δ∥2​>R there is a base classifier f∗f^*f∗ consistent with (6) and a class c≠cAc\ne c_Ac=cA​ with

P(f∗(x+δ+ε)=cA) < P(f∗(x+δ+ε)=c),\mathbb P(f^*(x+\delta+\varepsilon)=c_A)\ <\ \mathbb P(f^*(x+\delta+\varepsilon)=c),P(f∗(x+δ+ε)=cA​) < P(f∗(x+δ+ε)=c),

so that g(x+δ)≠cAg(x+\delta)\ne c_Ag(x+δ)=cA​ under any tie-breaking. The classifier may depend on δ\deltaδ.

The class-capacity hypothesis is a correction. As printed, with only pA‾+pB‾≤1\underline{p_A}+\overline{p_B}\le1pA​​+pB​​≤1, the theorem fails for two classes: with Y={cA,cB}\mathcal Y=\{c_A,c_B\}Y={cA​,cB​}, pA‾=0.6\underline{p_A}=0.6pA​​=0.6, pB‾=0.1\overline{p_B}=0.1pB​​=0.1 and σ=∥δ∥2=1\sigma=\|\delta\|_2=1σ=∥δ∥2​=1, one has R≈0.767<1R\approx0.767<1R≈0.767<1, yet every consistent fff gives cAc_AcA​ probability at least 0.90.90.9, and Theorem 1 then certifies radius Φ−1(0.9)≈1.28\Phi^{-1}(0.9)\approx1.28Φ−1(0.9)≈1.28.

Milestones

The milestones are the steps the paper itself states, in its order: the Claims P(X∈A)=pA‾\mathbb P(X\in A)=\underline{p_A}P(X∈A)=pA​​ and P(X∈B)=pB‾\mathbb P(X\in B)=\overline{p_B}P(X∈B)=pB​​ for X∼N(x,σ2I)X\sim\mathcal N(x,\sigma^2I)X∼N(x,σ2I); the disjointness of AAA and BBB (corrected to "null" when pA‾+pB‾=1\underline{p_A}+\overline{p_B}=1pA​​+pB​​=1); equations (13) and (14) for Y∼N(x+δ,σ2I)Y\sim\mathcal N(x+\delta,\sigma^2I)Y∼N(x+δ,σ2I),

P(Y∈A)=Φ(Φ−1(pA‾)−∥δ∥σ),P(Y∈B)=Φ(Φ−1(pB‾)+∥δ∥σ);\mathbb P(Y\in A)=\Phi\Big(\Phi^{-1}(\underline{p_A})-\tfrac{\|\delta\|}{\sigma}\Big),\qquad \mathbb P(Y\in B)=\Phi\Big(\Phi^{-1}(\overline{p_B})+\tfrac{\|\delta\|}{\sigma}\Big);P(Y∈A)=Φ(Φ−1(pA​​)−σ∥δ∥​),P(Y∈B)=Φ(Φ−1(pB​​)+σ∥δ∥​);

the equivalence P(Y∈A)<P(Y∈B)  ⟺  ∥δ∥2>R\mathbb P(Y\in A)<\mathbb P(Y\in B)\iff\|\delta\|_2>RP(Y∈A)<P(Y∈B)⟺∥δ∥2​>R; and the existence of the worst-case classifier f∗f^*f∗ satisfying (6) with equalities.

Significance

Theorem 2 makes the guarantee of Theorem 1 exact: when only (6) is known about fff, the set of perturbations under which the Gaussian-smoothed prediction is provably constant is exactly the open ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ ball of radius RRR. It settles that improvements to Gaussian-smoothing certificates must use more information about the base classifier than the two bounds, as later work on higher-order and Lipschitz-based certificates does.

The paper's proof is complete in its main lines and has two gaps that this mission records and repairs: the printed statement omits a condition on the number of classes, and the claim A∩B=∅A\cap B=\emptysetA∩B=∅ fails at pA‾+pB‾=1\underline{p_A}+\overline{p_B}=1pA​​+pB​​=1. To our knowledge neither Theorem 1 nor Theorem 2 has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib at the pinned revision has the multivariate standard Gaussian but no normal quantile function and no Gaussian half-space lemma; this mission adds statements for both kinds of fact.

Difficulty

Each step is elementary on paper but rests on facts about Gaussians that Mathlib does not package: the image of the standard Gaussian on Rd\mathbb R^dRd under a linear functional z↦δTzz\mapsto\delta^T zz↦δTz is the one-dimensional Gaussian with variance ∥δ∥2\|\delta\|^2∥δ∥2, and Φ\PhiΦ is a continuous strictly increasing bijection R→(0,1)\mathbb R\to(0,1)R→(0,1) with Φ−1(1−p)=−Φ−1(p)\Phi^{-1}(1-p)=-\Phi^{-1}(p)Φ−1(1−p)=−Φ−1(p). The construction of f∗f^*f∗ has a further step the paper leaves informal: the region between AAA and BBB, of mass 1−pA‾−pB‾1-\underline{p_A}-\overline{p_B}1−pA​​−pB​​, must be shared among "other classes" with none exceeding pB‾\overline{p_B}pB​​, which is where the capacity hypothesis enters. Measurability of the constructed decision regions must be carried along.

Formalization scope

Rd\mathbb R^dRd is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d). N(x,σ2I)\mathcal N(x,\sigma^2I)N(x,σ2I) is the pushforward of Mathlib's stdGaussian under z↦x+σzz\mapsto x+\sigma zz↦x+σz, with σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 a binder. Φ\PhiΦ is cdf (gaussianReal 0 1); Φ−1(p)\Phi^{-1}(p)Φ−1(p) is the generalized inverse inf⁡{t:p≤Φ(t)}\inf\{t:p\le\Phi(t)\}inf{t:p≤Φ(t)}, which is the true inverse on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) and the junk value 000 at the endpoints, so every statement that evaluates it assumes 0<p<10<p<10<p<1; at pB‾=0\overline{p_B}=0pB​​=0 or pA‾=1\underline{p_A}=1pA​​=1 the paper's radius is infinite and Theorem 2 is vacuous. Class probabilities are real numbers. The base classifier in the conclusion is deterministic with Borel decision regions, which is the stronger existence statement. The conclusion is the strict inequality between class probabilities, not merely the failure of cAc_AcA​ to be a strict unique argmax.

A formalization in which the junk endpoint value of Φ−1\Phi^{-1}Φ−1 makes RRR negative, or in which the classifier's decision regions are non-measurable so that its class probabilities are default values, would make the goal trivial; the hypotheses above exclude both.

Reusable beyond this mission: the Gaussian half-space probabilities and the normal quantile on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). Contributions of general Mathlib-style lemmas (the law of δTX\delta^T XδTX for X∼N(x,σ2I)X\sim\mathcal N(x,\sigma^2I)X∼N(x,σ2I), properties of Φ−1\Phi^{-1}Φ−1) are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. M. Cohen, E. Rosenfeld, J. Z. Kolter, Certified Adversarial Robustness via Randomized Smoothing, ICML 2019; arXiv:1902.02918v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1902.02918v2
  • M. Lecuyer, V. Atlidakis, R. Geambasu, D. Hsu, S. Jana, Certified Robustness to Adversarial Examples with Differential Privacy, IEEE S&P 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1802.03471
  • B. Li, C. Chen, W. Wang, L. Carin, Certified Adversarial Robustness with Additive Noise, NeurIPS 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1809.03113
  • J. Neyman, E. S. Pearson, On the Problem of the Most Efficient Tests of Statistical Hypotheses, Phil. Trans. R. Soc. A 231, 1933. https://doi.org/10.1098/rsta.1933.0009
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Weighted Sums of Certain Dependent Random Variables 3: Reversed Weighted Sums of Bounded Martingale Differences Obey a Strong LawResearch Paper

Motivation

A martingale difference sequence is the standard model of a "fair" sequence of observations whose terms may depend on the past: each new term has conditional mean zero given everything observed before it. Laws of large numbers for such sequences underlie the analysis of stochastic approximation, sequential estimation and online learning, where the noise terms are dependent but conditionally centred.

Classical strong laws concern averages in which every observation keeps the same weight as the sample grows. Kazuoki Azuma's 1967 paper Weighted sums of certain dependent random variables (Tôhoku Math. J. 19) studies weighted sums of dependent variables, and is best known for the exponential moment bound that is now called the Azuma inequality (its display (2.4) together with Remark 1). Its Theorem 3 uses that bound to prove a strong law for weighted averages in which the weights are applied in reverse order, so that the oldest observation always receives the newest, largest weight.

Timeline:

  • 1960s: Y. S. Chow (Ann. Math. Statist. 37, 1966) introduces a conditional exponential-moment condition close to Azuma's property [G] in a convergence theorem for independent variables.
  • 1967: Azuma proves the moment bound (2.4) for conditionally sub-Gaussian martingale differences, a law of the iterated logarithm for direct weighted sums (Theorem 2), and the strong law for reversed weighted sums (Theorem 3), the subject of this mission.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega,\mathfrak A,P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space and (An)n≥0(\mathfrak A_n)_{n\ge0}(An​)n≥0​ an increasing family of sub-σ\sigmaσ-fields of A\mathfrak AA. A sequence (xn)n≥1(x_n)_{n\ge1}(xn​)n≥1​ of real random variables is a sequence of martingale differences if, for every n≥1n\ge1n≥1, xnx_nxn​ is An\mathfrak A_nAn​-measurable and integrable and E{xn∣An−1}=0E\{x_n\mid\mathfrak A_{n-1}\}=0E{xn​∣An−1​}=0 almost surely. Theorem 3 assumes moreover ∣xn∣≤1|x_n|\le1∣xn​∣≤1 almost surely for every nnn.

Let (an)n≥1(a_n)_{n\ge1}(an​)n≥1​ be positive increasing weights: an>0a_n>0an​>0 and an≤an+1a_n\le a_{n+1}an​≤an+1​. Put

An=a1+a2+⋯+an,Sˉn=anx1+an−1x2+⋯+a1xn=∑j=1nan−j+1xj.A_n = a_1+a_2+\dots+a_n,\qquad \bar S_n = a_nx_1 + a_{n-1}x_2+\dots+a_1x_n=\sum_{j=1}^n a_{n-j+1}x_j .An​=a1​+a2​+⋯+an​,Sˉn​=an​x1​+an−1​x2​+⋯+a1​xn​=j=1∑n​an−j+1​xj​.

The sums Sˉn\bar S_nSˉn​ are the reversed weighted sums. In passing from Sˉn\bar S_nSˉn​ to Sˉn+1\bar S_{n+1}Sˉn+1​ every existing term changes its weight, so (Sˉn)(\bar S_n)(Sˉn​) is in general not a martingale. In the Lean development, AnA_nAn​ is A a n, Sˉn(ω)\bar S_n(\omega)Sˉn​(ω) is Sbar a x n ω, and the martingale-difference property is IsMartingaleDiff μ ℱ x.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3, (4.9)–(4.10)

If (xn)(x_n)(xn​) is a sequence of martingale differences with ∣xn∣≤1|x_n|\le1∣xn​∣≤1 a.s., (an)(a_n)(an​) is positive and nondecreasing, and

anAn=o(1log⁡log⁡An)(n→∞),(4.9)\frac{a_n}{A_n}=o\Big(\frac{1}{\log\log A_n}\Big)\qquad(n\to\infty),\tag{4.9}An​an​​=o(loglogAn​1​)(n→∞),(4.9)

then

SˉnAn⟶0almost surely.(4.10)\frac{\bar S_n}{A_n}\longrightarrow0\quad\text{almost surely}.\tag{4.10}An​Sˉn​​⟶0almost surely.(4.10)

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof, in attack order.

  1. Remark 1 (p. 358): if ∣xn∣≤Kn|x_n|\le K_n∣xn​∣≤Kn​ a.s., then E{exp⁡(txn)∣An−1}≤cosh⁡(tKn)≤exp⁡(t2Kn2/2)E\{\exp(tx_n)\mid\mathfrak A_{n-1}\}\le\cosh(tK_n)\le\exp(t^2K_n^2/2)E{exp(txn​)∣An−1​}≤cosh(tKn​)≤exp(t2Kn2​/2) a.s.
  2. The tail step of (4.16) (p. 366): for ∣xn∣≤1|x_n|\le1∣xn​∣≤1, real c1,…,cNc_1,\dots,c_Nc1​,…,cN​ with ∑cj2>0\sum c_j^2>0∑cj2​>0 and λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0,
P{∑j=1Ncjxj>λ}≤exp⁡(−λ22∑j=1Ncj2).P\Big\{\sum_{j=1}^Nc_jx_j>\lambda\Big\}\le\exp\Big(-\frac{\lambda^2}{2\sum_{j=1}^Nc_j^2}\Big).P{j=1∑N​cj​xj​>λ}≤exp(−2∑j=1N​cj2​λ2​).
  1. The blocks (4.11)–(4.14) (pp. 364–365): for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 there are indices n1<n2<⋯n_1<n_2<\cdotsn1​<n2​<⋯ with An1>2(3+ε)/(6+ε)A_{n_1}>2(3+\varepsilon)/(6+\varepsilon)An1​​>2(3+ε)/(6+ε), an/An<ε/(6+ε)a_n/A_n<\varepsilon/(6+\varepsilon)an​/An​<ε/(6+ε) and anlog⁡log⁡An/An<ε2/64a_n\log\log A_n/A_n<\varepsilon^2/64an​loglogAn​/An​<ε2/64 for n>n1n>n_1n>n1​, and Ank−1<Ank≤(1+ε/3)Ank−1<Ank+1A_{n_{k-1}}<A_{n_k}\le(1+\varepsilon/3)A_{n_{k-1}}<A_{n_k+1}Ank−1​​<Ank​​≤(1+ε/3)Ank−1​​<Ank​+1​.
  2. The maximal inequality (4.15) (p. 365): if AN1≤(1+ε/3)AN0A_{N_1}\le(1+\varepsilon/3)A_{N_0}AN1​​≤(1+ε/3)AN0​​ with 1≤N0<N11\le N_0<N_11≤N0​<N1​, then
2P{SˉN1>(ε/2)AN0}≥P{max⁡N0<n≤N1Sˉn>εAN0}.2P\{\bar S_{N_1}>(\varepsilon/2)A_{N_0}\}\ge P\Big\{\max_{N_0<n\le N_1}\bar S_n>\varepsilon A_{N_0}\Big\}.2P{SˉN1​​>(ε/2)AN0​​}≥P{N0​<n≤N1​max​Sˉn​>εAN0​​}.
  1. Block growth (p. 366): (4.11), (4.12) and (4.14) give Ank>(2(3+ε)/(6+ε))k−1A_{n_k}>(2(3+\varepsilon)/(6+\varepsilon))^{k-1}Ank​​>(2(3+ε)/(6+ε))k−1.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 shows that reversed weighting does not destroy the strong law, under a growth condition on the weights that is strictly weaker than the condition an2/∑j≤naj2→0a_n^2/\sum_{j\le n}a_j^2\to0an2​/∑j≤n​aj2​→0 of the paper's Theorem 2: the paper reproduces an example of T. Tsuchikura satisfying (4.9) but not that condition. The condition allows rapidly growing weights, provided no single weight carries more than an o(1/log⁡log⁡An)o(1/\log\log A_n)o(1/loglogAn​) share of the total. Milestone 2 is the one-sided Azuma inequality in the paper's conditional-expectation form, a tool used throughout probability, combinatorics and learning theory. Milestone 4 is a maximal inequality for a process that is not a martingale, where Doob's inequality cannot be used.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; this mission produces a machine-checked proof. Mathlib contains sub-Gaussian moment-generating-function bounds for martingale differences in a kernel formulation (HasCondSubgaussianMGF, which assumes a standard Borel space), and the Prove2Me platform has two-sided Azuma–Hoeffding inequalities under the same assumption. Neither states Remark 1 or the one-sided tail bound in the paper's conditional-expectation form on an arbitrary probability space, and no strong law for reversed weighted sums is formalized.

Difficulty

The obvious route to a strong law for a martingale, Doob's maximal inequality applied along a geometric subsequence, fails at the first step: (Sˉn)(\bar S_n)(Sˉn​) is not a martingale, because each new step reweights all earlier terms. The maximum of Sˉn\bar S_nSˉn​ over a block of indices therefore needs a separate maximal inequality, and it is there that the monotonicity of the weights is indispensable. A second difficulty is quantitative: the exponential tail bound must be summable over blocks whose growth is controlled only through (4.9), which is weaker than the variance-type condition of Theorem 2, so the block sizes and the constants ε/(6+ε)\varepsilon/(6+\varepsilon)ε/(6+ε), ε2/64\varepsilon^2/64ε2/64 and 1+ε/31+\varepsilon/31+ε/3 have to be chosen to fit together.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in Lean:

  • Indices start at 111: sums run over Finset.Icc 1 n, and a0a_0a0​, x0x_0x0​ are never used. Every hypothesis on aaa and xxx is quantified over n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ. Its first σ\sigmaσ-field plays the role of A0\mathfrak A_0A0​ and is arbitrary rather than trivial; the paper's A0={∅,Ω}\mathfrak A_0=\{\emptyset,\Omega\}A0​={∅,Ω} is a special case, so the formal statements are at least as general.
  • "Positive increasing" is read as an>0a_n>0an​>0 and an≤an+1a_n\le a_{n+1}an​≤an+1​ (nondecreasing), the weaker hypothesis.
  • (4.9) is stated literally as a little-ooo relation (IsLittleO along atTop). An→∞A_n\to\inftyAn​→∞ is not a hypothesis, since it follows from positivity and monotonicity.
  • The conclusion is convergence of the real sequence Sˉn(ω)/An\bar S_n(\omega)/A_nSˉn​(ω)/An​ to 000 for almost every ω\omegaω, which contains both the upper and the lower tail; a statement giving only lim sup⁡≤0\limsup\le0limsup≤0 is not the goal. No real-valued limsup is used anywhere.
  • Probabilities are real-valued (μ.real); conditional expectations are Mathlib's μ[f | ℱ n].

A formalization of the goal that replaces Sˉn\bar S_nSˉn​ by the direct sums a1x1+⋯+anxna_1x_1+\dots+a_nx_na1​x1​+⋯+an​xn​, drops the monotonicity of the weights, or strengthens (4.9) to an/An=o(1/log⁡An)a_n/A_n=o(1/\log A_n)an​/An​=o(1/logAn​) or to an2/∑j≤naj2→0a_n^2/\sum_{j\le n}a_j^2\to0an2​/∑j≤n​aj2​→0 states a different theorem and does not count.

A complete development needs the Azuma moment bound in conditional-expectation form, conditional Chebyshev arguments on events, the Borel–Cantelli lemma (in Mathlib) and elementary real analysis of the blocks. The one-sided Azuma inequality and the maximal inequality (4.15) are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative proofs of the goal.

Selected references

  • K. Azuma, Weighted sums of certain dependent random variables, Tôhoku Mathematical Journal 19 (1967), 357–367. https://doi.org/10.2748/tmj/1178243286
  • Y. S. Chow, Some convergence theorems for independent random variables, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 37 (1966), 1482–1493.
  • J. L. Doob, Stochastic Processes, Wiley, New York, 1953.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsMachine LearningOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Analysis of Thompson Sampling for the Multi-armed Bandit Problem 2: Logarithmic Regret for N ArmsResearch Paper

Motivation

Thompson Sampling is the oldest heuristic for the multi-armed bandit problem: proposed by Thompson in 1933, it plays each arm with the posterior probability that the arm is the best one. It is simple to implement, performs well empirically (Chapelle and Li, NIPS 2011), and has been used in production systems such as click-through-rate prediction for search advertising. For a long time, however, no finite-time regret guarantee was known for it: the analyses available before 2012 gave only o(T)o(T)o(T) regret.

Agrawal and Goyal (arXiv:1111.1797, COLT 2012) gave the first logarithmic bounds on the expected regret of Thompson Sampling. This mission formalizes their bound for the general case of NNN arms (their Theorem 2). A companion mission of the same series formalizes their two-armed bound (Theorem 1), whose proof is independent.

Timeline. Lai and Robbins (1985) proved that every consistent algorithm has regret at least of order ∑iΔiD(μi∥μ1)ln⁡T\sum_i \frac{\Delta_i}{D(\mu_i\|\mu_1)}\ln T∑i​D(μi​∥μ1​)Δi​​lnT. Auer, Cesa-Bianchi and Fischer (2002) showed that UCB1 achieves O(∑iln⁡T/Δi)O(\sum_i \ln T/\Delta_i)O(∑i​lnT/Δi​) in finite time. Agrawal and Goyal (2012) proved O((∑a1/Δa2)2ln⁡T)O((\sum_a 1/\Delta_a^2)^2\ln T)O((∑a​1/Δa2​)2lnT) for Thompson Sampling with NNN arms; Kaufmann, Korda and Munos (2012) and Agrawal and Goyal (2013) later proved the asymptotically optimal constant for Bernoulli rewards.

Setting

A stochastic NNN-armed bandit has arms 1,…,N1,\dots,N1,…,N. Arm iii, when played, yields a random reward drawn from a fixed distribution νi\nu_iνi​ supported in [0,1][0,1][0,1], with mean μi\mu_iμi​; rewards of an arm are i.i.d. and independent of the other arms. Arm 111 is assumed to be the unique optimal arm, μ1>μi\mu_1>\mu_iμ1​>μi​ for i≠1i\ne1i=1, and Δi=μ1−μi>0\Delta_i=\mu_1-\mu_i>0Δi​=μ1​−μi​>0 is the gap of arm iii.

Thompson Sampling for general stochastic bandits (Algorithm 2 of the paper) keeps, for each arm iii, a count SiS_iSi​ of successes and FiF_iFi​ of failures, both starting at 000. In each round ttt it draws θi(t)∼Beta(Si+1,Fi+1)\theta_i(t)\sim\mathrm{Beta}(S_i+1,F_i+1)θi​(t)∼Beta(Si​+1,Fi​+1) independently for every arm, plays i(t)=arg⁡max⁡iθi(t)i(t)=\arg\max_i\theta_i(t)i(t)=argmaxi​θi​(t), observes a reward r~t∼νi(t)\tilde r_t\sim\nu_{i(t)}r~t​∼νi(t)​, performs a Bernoulli trial with success probability r~t\tilde r_tr~t​, and increments Si(t)S_{i(t)}Si(t)​ on success and Fi(t)F_{i(t)}Fi(t)​ on failure.

The expected regret in time TTT is

E[R(T)]=E[∑t=1T(μ∗−μi(t))],μ∗=max⁡iμi,\mathbb E[\mathcal R(T)]=\mathbb E\Big[\sum_{t=1}^T(\mu^*-\mu_{i(t)})\Big],\qquad \mu^*=\max_i\mu_i,E[R(T)]=E[t=1∑T​(μ∗−μi(t)​)],μ∗=imax​μi​,

the expectation being over the rewards, the Bernoulli trials and the posterior samples.

The proof works with the reward stacks Zi,mZ_{i,m}Zi,m​: the outcome of the mmm-th Bernoulli trial of arm iii, all independent. Then s(j)=∑m≤jZ1,ms(j)=\sum_{m\le j}Z_{1,m}s(j)=∑m≤j​Z1,m​, the number of successes in the first jjj plays of arm 111, is a Binomial(j,μ1)\mathrm{Binomial}(j,\mu_1)Binomial(j,μ1​) random variable. The other objects of the proof are the threshold Li=24ln⁡T/Δi2L_i=24\ln T/\Delta_i^2Li​=24lnT/Δi2​, the saturated set C(t)C(t)C(t) of suboptimal arms with at least LiL_iLi​ plays before round ttt, the intervals IjI_jIj​ between the jjj-th and (j+1)(j+1)(j+1)-th plays of arm 111, and the counts γj\gamma_jγj​ and Vjℓ,aV_j^{\ell,a}Vjℓ,a​ defined in §4.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2

There is an absolute constant C>0C>0C>0 such that for every N≥2N\ge2N≥2, every instance as above and every horizon T≥2T\ge2T≥2,

E[R(T)]≤C(∑a=2N1Δa2)2ln⁡T.\mathbb E[\mathcal R(T)]\le C\Big(\sum_{a=2}^N\frac{1}{\Delta_a^2}\Big)^2\ln T .E[R(T)]≤C(a=2∑N​Δa2​1​)2lnT.

CCC does not depend on NNN, on the reward distributions or on TTT.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 4: with E(t)E(t)E(t) the event that every saturated arm's sample lies within Δi/2\Delta_i/2Δi​/2 of its mean, Pr⁡(E(t))≥1−4(N−1)/T2\Pr(E(t))\ge1-4(N-1)/T^2Pr(E(t))≥1−4(N−1)/T2, also conditionally on s(j)=ss(j)=ss(j)=s.
  2. Lemma 5 (Eq. (7)): the expected regret from saturated arms inside IjI_jIj​ is at most E[E[γj+1∣s(j)]∑aΔaE[min⁡{X(j,s(j),μa+Δa/2),T}∣s(j)]]\mathbb E\big[\mathbb E[\gamma_j+1\mid s(j)]\sum_a\Delta_a\mathbb E[\min\{X(j,s(j),\mu_a+\Delta_a/2),T\}\mid s(j)]\big]E[E[γj​+1∣s(j)]∑a​Δa​E[min{X(j,s(j),μa​+Δa​/2),T}∣s(j)]].
  3. Lemma 1: E[X(j,s,y)]=1/Fj+1,yB(s)−1\mathbb E[X(j,s,y)]=1/F^B_{j+1,y}(s)-1E[X(j,s,y)]=1/Fj+1,yB​(s)−1, where X(j,s,y)X(j,s,y)X(j,s,y) counts the trials before an independent Beta(s+1,j−s+1)\mathrm{Beta}(s+1,j-s+1)Beta(s+1,j−s+1) sample exceeds yyy.
  4. Lemma 3: a three-case bound on E[E[min⁡{X(j,s(j),y),T}∣s(j)]]\mathbb E[\mathbb E[\min\{X(j,s(j),y),T\}\mid s(j)]]E[E[min{X(j,s(j),y),T}∣s(j)]] in terms of the Bernoulli KL divergence DDD between yyy and μ1\mu_1μ1​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 shows that Thompson Sampling, a randomized Bayesian heuristic, achieves regret logarithmic in the horizon for any number of arms with bounded rewards, matching the order in TTT of the Lai–Robbins lower bound. Its dependence on the gaps, (∑aΔa−2)2(\sum_a\Delta_a^{-2})^2(∑a​Δa−2​)2, is worse than UCB1's; the paper's own Remark 1 and later work improve it. The proof introduced the device of bounding the waiting time between plays of the optimal arm through geometric variables with Beta-cdf parameters (Lemmas 1 and 3), which reappears in later analyses of Thompson Sampling.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper; it has not been machine-checked. Bandit theory in Lean (bandit environments, regret, UCB-type analyses) is still young, and no Beta–Bernoulli Thompson Sampling result is formalized. The mission produces a Lean model of Algorithm 2 for general [0,1][0,1][0,1] rewards with the paper's stack coupling, the §4 bookkeeping of saturated arms and intervals, and the paper's lemmas as separate targets.

Difficulty

Two difficulties are specific to the NNN-armed analysis. First, the arm that competes with arm 111 changes over time: the set of saturated arms grows, and which saturated arm is "best" depends on the history, so the waiting time between plays of arm 111 cannot be compared with a single geometric variable as in the two-armed case. Second, the number γj\gamma_jγj​ of rounds at which arm 111's sample is large but arm 111 is not played is not independent of the counts Vjℓ,aV_j^{\ell,a}Vjℓ,a​: both depend on the same posterior samples, and Lemma 5 needs a careful conditioning on the history to separate them. The obvious union bound over arms, treating each suboptimal arm as in the two-armed proof, fails because it ignores the interruptions by unsaturated arms, whose number is the source of the squared sum in the bound.

Formalization scope

  • Probability space. Algorithm 2 is realized on a product of three independent i.i.d. tables: Beta draws indexed by (arm, round, successes, failures), rewards indexed by (arm, round) and uniform variables indexed by (arm, round); the Bernoulli trial of a round succeeds when the played arm's uniform variable is below its reward. The law of the run is that of Algorithm 2, which runs for every round t=1,2,…t=1,2,\dotst=1,2,…. s(j)s(j)s(j) is the number of successful trials among the first jjj plays of arm 111 in this infinite run (possibly after the horizon TTT), so it is a Binomial(j,μ1)\mathrm{Binomial}(j,\mu_1)Binomial(j,μ1​) random variable for every jjj, as the paper's independent Z1,mZ_{1,m}Z1,m​ make it. Ties in the arg max (probability 000) go to the smallest index.
  • Indexing. Arms are Fin N, and Lean arm 0 is the paper's arm 111. Rounds are 0,…,T−10,\dots,T-10,…,T−1; Lean round ttt is the paper's round t+1t+1t+1. Sums over a=2,…,Na=2,\dots,Na=2,…,N are sums over a≠0a\ne0a=0.
  • Expectations are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], which has no junk value for non-integrable functions. Conditional expectations given s(j)s(j)s(j) are written as finite sums over the values of s(j)s(j)s(j).
  • The O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅). The paper writes O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) in the sense of its footnote 1 (f(n)≤c g(n)f(n)\le c\,g(n)f(n)≤cg(n) for n≥n0n\ge n_0n≥n0​). The goal states it with one universal constant CCC, quantified before NNN, the instance and TTT, for every T≥2T\ge2T≥2. The explicit constants printed in App. D are not formalized: expanding the paper's Eq. (21) gives terms 288(N−1)(ln⁡T)∑aΔa−2288(N-1)(\ln T)\sum_a\Delta_a^{-2}288(N−1)(lnT)∑a​Δa−2​ and 48(N−1)248(N-1)^248(N−1)2 where the paper prints 288(ln⁡T)∑iΔi−2288(\ln T)\sum_i\Delta_i^{-2}288(lnT)∑i​Δi−2​, and Eq. (22) drops a factor ln⁡T\ln TlnT in its 192/Δa2192/\Delta_a^2192/Δa2​ term. The O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) claim does not depend on these slips; a statement pinned to the printed numerals might be false.
  • Ruled out. A constant depending on NNN, on the means or on TTT; a fixed number of arms; Bernoulli rewards only; or any algorithm other than Algorithm 2 would each make the goal a different and weaker theorem. The statement quantifies over all N≥2N\ge2N≥2 and all reward distributions on [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  • Not included. Eq. (8), the bound ∑jE[γj∣s(j)]≤∑uLu+4(N−1)\sum_{j}\mathbb E[\gamma_j\mid s(j)]\le\sum_uL_u+4(N-1)∑j​E[γj​∣s(j)]≤∑u​Lu​+4(N−1) "for all instantiations", is not a milestone: each term is conditioned on a different s(j)s(j)s(j), and the pointwise reading does not follow from the argument given. Remark 1 (an alternate bound) and App. A (several optimal arms) are not part of this mission.
  • Contributions welcome: Beta–Binomial identities, geometric waiting times, Hoeffding bounds for binomial cdfs, and the stopping-time arguments behind Lemma 5. Lemma 1 and Lemma 3 are shared with the two-armed mission of this series.

Selected references

  • S. Agrawal and N. Goyal, Analysis of Thompson Sampling for the Multi-armed Bandit Problem, COLT 2012; arXiv:1111.1797v3, 2012. https://arxiv.org/abs/1111.1797
  • W. R. Thompson, On the likelihood that one unknown probability exceeds another in view of the evidence of two samples, Biometrika 25, 1933. https://doi.org/10.1093/biomet/25.3-4.285
  • T. L. Lai and H. Robbins, Asymptotically efficient adaptive allocation rules, Advances in Applied Mathematics 6, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-8858(85)90002-8
  • P. Auer, N. Cesa-Bianchi and P. Fischer, Finite-time analysis of the multiarmed bandit problem, Machine Learning 47, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1013689704352
  • O. Chapelle and L. Li, An empirical evaluation of Thompson Sampling, NIPS 2011. https://papers.nips.cc/paper/4321-an-empirical-evaluation-of-thompson-sampling
  • E. Kaufmann, N. Korda and R. Munos, Thompson Sampling: an asymptotically optimal finite-time analysis, ALT 2012. https://arxiv.org/abs/1205.4217
  • S. Agrawal and N. Goyal, Further optimal regret bounds for Thompson Sampling, AISTATS 2013. https://arxiv.org/abs/1209.3353
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior 1: Independence of Irrelevant Alternatives with a Universal Benchmark Yields Logit Selection ProbabilitiesResearch Paper

Motivation

The conditional logit model is the workhorse of discrete choice analysis: it is used to forecast travel mode shares, to estimate demand for differentiated products, and, in operations research, as the multinomial logit (MNL) choice model behind assortment optimization and revenue management. Its selection probabilities have the form P(x∣s,B)=ev(s,x)/∑y∈Bev(s,y)P(x\mid s,B) = e^{v(s,x)}/\sum_{y\in B} e^{v(s,y)}P(x∣s,B)=ev(s,x)/∑y∈B​ev(s,y). Daniel McFadden's 1974 chapter Conditional Logit Analysis of Qualitative Choice Behavior gave the model two behavioural foundations, one of which is the subject of this mission: the logit form is a consequence of a single axiom on how choice probabilities change when the set of available alternatives changes.

That axiom is Luce's choice axiom, which McFadden calls Independence of Irrelevant Alternatives (IIA): the relative odds of choosing one alternative over another do not depend on which other alternatives are present. Luce (1959) introduced it; McFadden (1974, §I) showed how, together with positivity and a mild condition on which alternative sets can occur, it yields the conditional logit form with a "utility indicator" v(s,x)v(s,x)v(s,x) shared by all alternative sets.

Timeline. Luce, Individual Choice Behavior (1959): the choice axiom and its ratio-scale representation. McFadden (1974, pp. 109–110): the derivation in the econometric setting with measured attributes sss, the binary-odds identities (5)–(10), and footnote 3, which removes an extra axiom (Axiom 3) by a universal benchmark alternative. McFadden (1974, pp. 111–112): the companion random-utility characterization by extreme-value shocks, treated in mission 2 of this series.

Setting

Let XXX be the universe of objects of choice and SSS the universe of vectors of measured attributes of decision-makers. An alternative set is a finite set B⊆XB\subseteq XB⊆X; a designated family of finite sets is the family of possible alternative sets. The selection probability P(x∣s,B)P(x\mid s,B)P(x∣s,B) is the probability that an individual drawn at random from the population, with attributes sss and facing BBB, chooses x∈Bx\in Bx∈B. For every sss and possible BBB, x↦P(x∣s,B)x\mapsto P(x\mid s,B)x↦P(x∣s,B) is a probability vector on BBB. Whenever x≠yx\neq yx=y belong to a possible set, the pair {x,y}\{x,y\}{x,y} is possible too, so binary choices are defined.

  • Axiom 1 (IIA). For all possible BBB, all sss and all x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B: P(x∣s,{x,y})P(y∣s,B)=P(y∣s,{x,y})P(x∣s,B)P(x\mid s,\{x,y\})P(y\mid s,B) = P(y\mid s,\{x,y\})P(x\mid s,B)P(x∣s,{x,y})P(y∣s,B)=P(y∣s,{x,y})P(x∣s,B).
  • Axiom 2 (Positivity). P(x∣s,B)>0P(x\mid s,B)>0P(x∣s,B)>0 for all possible BBB, all sss, all x∈Bx\in Bx∈B.
  • Binary probabilities. pxy=P(x∣s,{x,y})p_{xy}=P(x\mid s,\{x,y\})pxy​=P(x∣s,{x,y}) for x≠yx\neq yx=y, and pxx=12p_{xx}=\tfrac12pxx​=21​ by definition.
  • The function VVV. V(s,x,z)=log⁡(pxz/pzx)V(s,x,z)=\log(p_{xz}/p_{zx})V(s,x,z)=log(pxz​/pzx​).
  • Universal benchmark. An alternative zzz such that B∪{z}B\cup\{z\}B∪{z} is possible whenever BBB is.

In Lean these are IsSelectionProb, PairsPossible, Axiom1, Axiom2, binProb, altSetV and IsUniversalBenchmark in the namespace McFadden1974.IIA.

Formalization targets

Goal: footnote 3 with Equation (12)

Under Axioms 1 and 2 and a universal benchmark zzz, with v(s,x)=V(s,x,z)v(s,x)=V(s,x,z)v(s,x)=V(s,x,z), for every sss, every possible BBB (containing zzz or not) and every x∈Bx\in Bx∈B:

P(x∣s,B)=ev(s,x)∑y∈Bev(s,y).P(x\mid s,B) = \frac{e^{v(s,x)}}{\sum_{y\in B} e^{v(s,y)}}.P(x∣s,B)=∑y∈B​ev(s,y)ev(s,x)​.

The function vvv is the same for all alternative sets; this is what distinguishes the goal from Equation (10).

Milestones, in the paper's order

  1. Equation (5): for x≠yx\neq yx=y in BBB with P(x∣s,B)>0P(x\mid s,B)>0P(x∣s,B)>0, Axiom 1 gives P(x∣s,{x,y})>0P(x\mid s,\{x,y\})>0P(x∣s,{x,y})>0 and P(y∣s,{x,y})P(x∣s,{x,y})=P(y∣s,B)P(x∣s,B)\dfrac{P(y\mid s,\{x,y\})}{P(x\mid s,\{x,y\})}=\dfrac{P(y\mid s,B)}{P(x\mid s,B)}P(x∣s,{x,y})P(y∣s,{x,y})​=P(x∣s,B)P(y∣s,B)​.
  2. Equations (6)–(7): P(y∣s,B)=pyxpxyP(x∣s,B)P(y\mid s,B)=\dfrac{p_{yx}}{p_{xy}}P(x\mid s,B)P(y∣s,B)=pxy​pyx​​P(x∣s,B) and 1=(∑y∈Bpyxpxy)P(x∣s,B)1=\Big(\sum_{y\in B}\dfrac{p_{yx}}{p_{xy}}\Big)P(x\mid s,B)1=(∑y∈B​pxy​pyx​​)P(x∣s,B).
  3. Equation (8): P(x∣s,B)=1/∑y∈B(pyx/pxy)P(x\mid s,B)=1\big/\sum_{y\in B}(p_{yx}/p_{xy})P(x∣s,B)=1/∑y∈B​(pyx​/pxy​).
  4. Equation (9): pyxpxy=pyz/pzypxz/pzx\dfrac{p_{yx}}{p_{xy}}=\dfrac{p_{yz}/p_{zy}}{p_{xz}/p_{zx}}pxy​pyx​​=pxz​/pzx​pyz​/pzy​​ for x,y,zx,y,zx,y,z in a possible set.
  5. Equation (10): for a benchmark z∈Bz\in Bz∈B, P(x∣s,B)=eV(s,x,z)/∑y∈BeV(s,y,z)P(x\mid s,B)=e^{V(s,x,z)}\big/\sum_{y\in B}e^{V(s,y,z)}P(x∣s,B)=eV(s,x,z)/∑y∈B​eV(s,y,z).

Significance

The result. The goal identifies a testable axiom on choice probabilities, IIA, with a parametric functional form, the conditional logit model. It is what licenses the econometric specification v(s,x)=θ′z(s,x)v(s,x)=\theta'z(s,x)v(s,x)=θ′z(s,x) estimated in the rest of McFadden's chapter, and it is the reason the MNL model is the default in assortment and pricing problems in operations research. It also makes the model's limitations precise: any population whose choices violate IIA (the auto/red-bus/blue-bus example on p. 113 of the chapter) cannot be logit.

Formalizing it. The result is classical and proved on paper. No machine-checked statement of it exists on the platform, which has the logit form only as a definition (soft-max, MNL revenue) and IIA only in Arrow's social-choice sense, a different axiom about preference aggregation. This mission produces a formal statement of the derivation with every standing assumption explicit, including two the paper leaves implicit: that selection probabilities are normalized on binary sets, and that binary subsets of possible sets are possible.

Difficulty

The algebra is elementary; the difficulty is bookkeeping of where each axiom may be applied. Axioms 1 and 2 are assumed only on possible alternative sets. Equation (10) needs the benchmark to lie in the alternative set, and the naive argument "pick z∈Bz\in Bz∈B as benchmark" produces a function V(s,x,z)V(s,x,z)V(s,x,z) that depends on the set through the choice of zzz. The goal requires a single vvv for all sets, including sets that do not contain zzz, where neither Equation (10) nor the axioms on BBB alone say anything about zzz. A second subtlety is the diagonal: {x,x}={x}\{x,x\}=\{x\}{x,x}={x}, so pxxp_{xx}pxx​ is set to 12\tfrac1221​ by definition rather than read off a singleton choice.

Formalization scope

Alternatives form a type X with decidable equality, alternative sets are Finset X, possible sets are a Set (Finset X), and selection probabilities are a real-valued function P : S → Finset X → X → ℝ. Only values P s B x with x ∈ B and B possible are constrained; no statement depends on the others. binProb sets the diagonal to 1/2. altSetV uses Real.log, which is 0 on non-positive arguments; under Axiom 2 on the binary sets its argument is always positive where it is used.

The probability-vector hypothesis on every possible set, binary sets included, is part of every statement: without it the zero function satisfies Axiom 1 vacuously and Equations (7)–(8) fail. The goal is stated with the explicit v(s,x)=V(s,x,z)v(s,x)=V(s,x,z)v(s,x)=V(s,x,z), never as "for each BBB there is a vvv", which would only restate (10).

Nothing beyond Mathlib's finite sums, Real.exp and Real.log is needed. Proofs of the milestones and of the goal are welcome, as is a formal statement of the auto/bus example or of the converse (logit selection probabilities satisfy Axioms 1 and 2).

Selected references

  • D. McFadden, Conditional logit analysis of qualitative choice behavior, in P. Zarembka (ed.), Frontiers in Econometrics, Academic Press, New York, 1974, pp. 105–142. https://eml.berkeley.edu/reprints/mcfadden/zarembka.pdf
  • R. D. Luce, Individual Choice Behavior: A Theoretical Analysis, Wiley, New York, 1959. https://doi.org/10.1037/14396-000
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 9 of 23Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me